Project Gutenberg's The Earliest Arithmetics in English, by Anonymous

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org


Title: The Earliest Arithmetics in English

Author: Anonymous

Editor: Robert Steele

Release Date: June 1, 2008 [EBook #25664]

Language: English

Character set encoding: UTF-8

*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE EARLIEST ARITHMETICS IN ENGLISH ***




Produced by Louise Hope, David Starner and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net





[Transcriber’s Note:

This e-text includes characters that will only display in UTF-8
(Unicode) text readers:

  ȝ, ſ (yogh, long s)
  ɳ, łł (n with curl, crossed l: see below)
  φ (Greek phi: see below)
  ʷ (small raised “w”)

If any of these characters do not display properly, or if the
apostrophes and quotation marks in this paragraph appear as garbage,
make sure your text reader’s “character set” or “file encoding” is set
to Unicode (UTF-8). You may also need to change the default font.

In _The Crafte of Nombrynge_, final “n” was sometimes written with an
extra curl. It has been rendered as ɳ for visual effect; the character
is not intended to convey phonetic information. In the same selection,
the numeral “0” was sometimes printed as Greek φ (phi); this has been
retained for the e-text. Double “l” with a line is shown as łł. The
first few occurrences of “d” (for “pence”) were printed with a
decorative curl. The letter is shown with the same “d’” used in the
remainder of the text.

The word “withdraw” or “w{i}t{h}draw” was inconsistently hyphenated;
it was left as printed, and line-end hyphens were retained.
Superscripts are shown with carets as ^e. Except for [Illustration]
markers and similar, all brackets are in the original.

Individual letters were italicized to show expanded abbreviations; these
are shown in br{ac}es. Other italicized words are shown conventionally
with _lines_, boldface with +marks+. When a footnote called for added
text, the addition is shown in the body text with [[double brackets]].

The original text contained at least five types of marginal note.
Details are given at the end of the e-text, followed by a listing of
typographical errors.]


       *       *       *       *       *
           *       *       *       *
       *       *       *       *       *


  The Earliest Arithmetics
  in English


  Early English Text Society.

  Extra Series, No. CXVIII.

  1922 (for 1916).




  THE EARLIEST ARITHMETICS
  IN ENGLISH

  Edited With Introduction

  by

  ROBERT STEELE

  London:
  Published for the Early English Text Society
  By Humphrey Milford, Oxford University Press,
  Amen Corner, E.C. 4.
  1922.




  [Titles (list added by transcriber):

  The Crafte of Nombrynge
  The Art of Nombryng
  Accomptynge by Counters
  The arte of nombrynge by the hande
  APP. I. A Treatise on the Numeration of Algorism
  APP. II. Carmen de Algorismo]




INTRODUCTION


The number of English arithmetics before the sixteenth century is very
small. This is hardly to be wondered at, as no one requiring to use even
the simplest operations of the art up to the middle of the fifteenth
century was likely to be ignorant of Latin, in which language there were
several treatises in a considerable number of manuscripts, as shown by
the quantity of them still in existence. Until modern commerce was
fairly well established, few persons required more arithmetic than
addition and subtraction, and even in the thirteenth century, scientific
treatises addressed to advanced students contemplated the likelihood of
their not being able to do simple division. On the other hand, the study
of astronomy necessitated, from its earliest days as a science,
considerable skill and accuracy in computation, not only in the
calculation of astronomical tables but in their use, a knowledge of
which latter was fairly common from the thirteenth to the sixteenth
centuries.

The arithmetics in English known to me are:--

  (1) Bodl. 790 G. VII. (2653) f. 146-154 (15th c.) _inc._ “Of angrym
  ther be IX figures in numbray . . .” A mere unfinished fragment,
  only getting as far as Duplation.

  (2) Camb. Univ. LI. IV. 14 (III.) f. 121-142 (15th c.) _inc._
  “Al maner of thyngis that prosedeth ffro the frist begynnyng . . .”

  (3) Fragmentary passages or diagrams in Sloane 213 f. 120-3
  (a fourteenth-century counting board), Egerton 2852 f. 5-13,
  Harl. 218 f. 147 and

  (4) The two MSS. here printed; Eg. 2622 f. 136 and Ashmole 396
  f. 48. All of these, as the language shows, are of the fifteenth
  century.

The CRAFTE OF NOMBRYNGE is one of a large number of scientific
treatises, mostly in Latin, bound up together as Egerton MS. 2622 in
the British Museum Library. It measures 7” × 5”, 29-30 lines to the
page, in a rough hand. The English is N.E. Midland in dialect. It is a
translation and amplification of one of the numerous glosses on the _de
algorismo_ of Alexander de Villa Dei (c. 1220), such as that of Thomas
of Newmarket contained in the British Museum MS. Reg. 12, E. 1.
A fragment of another translation of the same gloss was printed by
Halliwell in his _Rara Mathematica_ (1835) p. 29.[1*] It corresponds, as
far as p. 71, l. 2, roughly to p. 3 of our version, and from thence to
the end p. 2, ll. 16-40.

    [Footnote 1*: Halliwell printed the two sides of his leaf in the
    wrong order. This and some obvious errors of transcription--
    ‘ferye’ for ‘ferthe,’ ‘lest’ for ‘left,’ etc., have not been
    corrected in the reprint on pp. 70-71.]

The ART OF NOMBRYNG is one of the treatises bound up in the Bodleian MS.
Ashmole 396. It measures 11½” × 17¾”, and is written with thirty-three
lines to the page in a fifteenth century hand. It is a translation,
rather literal, with amplifications of the _de arte numerandi_
attributed to John of Holywood (Sacrobosco) and the translator had
obviously a poor MS. before him. The _de arte numerandi_ was printed in
1488, 1490 (_s.n._), 1501, 1503, 1510, 1517, 1521, 1522, 1523, 1582, and
by Halliwell separately and in his two editions of _Rara Mathematica_,
1839 and 1841, and reprinted by Curze in 1897.

Both these tracts are here printed for the first time, but the first
having been circulated in proof a number of years ago, in an endeavour
to discover other manuscripts or parts of manuscripts of it, Dr. David
Eugene Smith, misunderstanding the position, printed some pages in a
curious transcript with four facsimiles in the _Archiv für die
Geschichte der Naturwissenschaften und der Technik_, 1909, and invited
the scientific world to take up the “not unpleasant task” of editing it.

ACCOMPTYNGE BY COUNTERS is reprinted from the 1543 edition of Robert
Record’s Arithmetic, printed by R. Wolfe. It has been reprinted within
the last few years by Mr. F. P. Barnard, in his work on Casting
Counters. It is the earliest English treatise we have on this variety of
the Abacus (there are Latin ones of the end of the fifteenth century),
but there is little doubt in my mind that this method of performing the
simple operations of arithmetic is much older than any of the pen
methods. At the end of the treatise there follows a note on merchants’
and auditors’ ways of setting down sums, and lastly, a system of digital
numeration which seems of great antiquity and almost world-wide
extension.

After the fragment already referred to, I print as an appendix the
‘Carmen de Algorismo’ of Alexander de Villa Dei in an enlarged and
corrected form. It was printed for the first time by Halliwell in
_Rara Mathemathica_, but I have added a number of stanzas from various
manuscripts, selecting various readings on the principle that the verses
were made to scan, aided by the advice of my friend Mr. Vernon Rendall,
who is not responsible for the few doubtful lines I have conserved. This
poem is at the base of all other treatises on the subject in medieval
times, but I am unable to indicate its sources.


THE SUBJECT MATTER.

Ancient and medieval writers observed a distinction between the Science
and the Art of Arithmetic. The classical treatises on the subject, those
of Euclid among the Greeks and Boethius among the Latins, are devoted to
the Science of Arithmetic, but it is obvious that coeval with practical
Astronomy the Art of Calculation must have existed and have made
considerable progress. If early treatises on this art existed at all
they must, almost of necessity, have been in Greek, which was the
language of science for the Romans as long as Latin civilisation
existed. But in their absence it is safe to say that no involved
operations were or could have been carried out by means of the
alphabetic notation of the Greeks and Romans. Specimen sums have indeed
been constructed by moderns which show its possibility, but it is absurd
to think that men of science, acquainted with Egyptian methods and in
possession of the abacus,[2*] were unable to devise methods for its use.

    [Footnote 2*: For Egyptian use see Herodotus, ii. 36, Plato, _de
    Legibus_, VII.]


THE PRE-MEDIEVAL INSTRUMENTS USED IN CALCULATION.

The following are known:--

(1) A flat polished surface or tablets, strewn with sand, on which
figures were inscribed with a stylus.

(2) A polished tablet divided longitudinally into nine columns (or more)
grouped in threes, with which counters were used, either plain or marked
with signs denoting the nine numerals, etc.

(3) Tablets or boxes containing nine grooves or wires, in or on which
ran beads.

(4) Tablets on which nine (or more) horizontal lines were marked, each
third being marked off.

The only Greek counting board we have is of the fourth class and was
discovered at Salamis. It was engraved on a block of marble, and
measures 5 feet by 2½. Its chief part consists of eleven parallel lines,
the 3rd, 6th, and 9th being marked with a cross. Another section
consists of five parallel lines, and there are three rows of
arithmetical symbols. This board could only have been used with counters
(_calculi_), preferably unmarked, as in our treatise of _Accomptynge by
Counters_.


CLASSICAL ROMAN METHODS OF CALCULATION.

We have proof of two methods of calculation in ancient Rome, one by the
first method, in which the surface of sand was divided into columns by a
stylus or the hand. Counters (_calculi_, or _lapilli_), which were kept
in boxes (_loculi_), were used in calculation, as we learn from Horace’s
schoolboys (Sat. 1. vi. 74). For the sand see Persius I. 131, “Nec qui
abaco numeros et secto in pulvere metas scit risisse,” Apul. Apolog. 16
(pulvisculo), Mart. Capella, lib. vii. 3, 4, etc. Cicero says of an
expert calculator “eruditum attigisse pulverem,” (de nat. Deorum,
ii. 18). Tertullian calls a teacher of arithmetic “primus numerorum
arenarius” (de Pallio, _in fine_). The counters were made of various
materials, ivory principally, “Adeo nulla uncia nobis est eboris, etc.”
(Juv. XI. 131), sometimes of precious metals, “Pro calculis albis et
nigris aureos argenteosque habebat denarios” (Pet. Arb. Satyricon, 33).

There are, however, still in existence four Roman counting boards of a
kind which does not appear to come into literature. A typical one is of
the third class. It consists of a number of transverse wires, broken at
the middle. On the left hand portion four beads are strung, on the right
one (or two). The left hand beads signify units, the right hand one five
units. Thus any number up to nine can be represented. This instrument is
in all essentials the same as the Swanpan or Abacus in use throughout
the Far East. The Russian stchota in use throughout Eastern Europe is
simpler still. The method of using this system is exactly the same as
that of _Accomptynge by Counters_, the right-hand five bead replacing
the counter between the lines.


THE BOETHIAN ABACUS.

Between classical times and the tenth century we have little or no
guidance as to the art of calculation. Boethius (fifth century), at the
end of lib. II. of his _Geometria_ gives us a figure of an abacus of the
second class with a set of counters arranged within it. It has, however,
been contended with great probability that the whole passage is a tenth
century interpolation. As no rules are given for its use, the chief
value of the figure is that it gives the signs of the nine numbers,
known as the Boethian “apices” or “notae” (from whence our word
“notation”). To these we shall return later on.


THE ABACISTS.

It would seem probable that writers on the calendar like Bede (A.D. 721)
and Helpericus (A.D. 903) were able to perform simple calculations;
though we are unable to guess their methods, and for the most part they
were dependent on tables taken from Greek sources. We have no early
medieval treatises on arithmetic, till towards the end of the tenth
century we find a revival of the study of science, centring for us round
the name of Gerbert, who became Pope as Sylvester II. in 999. His
treatise on the use of the Abacus was written (c. 980) to a friend
Constantine, and was first printed among the works of Bede in the Basle
(1563) edition of his works, I. 159, in a somewhat enlarged form.
Another tenth century treatise is that of Abbo of Fleury (c. 988),
preserved in several manuscripts. Very few treatises on the use of the
Abacus can be certainly ascribed to the eleventh century, but from the
beginning of the twelfth century their numbers increase rapidly, to
judge by those that have been preserved.

The Abacists used a permanent board usually divided into twelve columns;
the columns were grouped in threes, each column being called an “arcus,”
and the value of a figure in it represented a tenth of what it would
have in the column to the left, as in our arithmetic of position. With
this board counters or jetons were used, either plain or, more probably,
marked with numerical signs, which with the early Abacists were the
“apices,” though counters from classical times were sometimes marked on
one side with the digital signs, on the other with Roman numerals. Two
ivory discs of this kind from the Hamilton collection may be seen at the
British Museum. Gerbert is said by Richer to have made for the purpose
of computation a thousand counters of horn; the usual number of a set of
counters in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries was a hundred.

Treatises on the Abacus usually consist of chapters on Numeration
explaining the notation, and on the rules for Multiplication and
Division. Addition, as far as it required any rules, came naturally
under Multiplication, while Subtraction was involved in the process of
Division. These rules were all that were needed in Western Europe in
centuries when commerce hardly existed, and astronomy was unpractised,
and even they were only required in the preparation of the calendar and
the assignments of the royal exchequer. In England, for example, when
the hide developed from the normal holding of a household into the unit
of taxation, the calculation of the geldage in each shire required a sum
in division; as we know from the fact that one of the Abacists proposes
the sum: “If 200 marks are levied on the county of Essex, which contains
according to Hugh of Bocland 2500 hides, how much does each hide
pay?”[3*] Exchequer methods up to the sixteenth century were founded on
the abacus, though when we have details later on, a different and
simpler form was used.

    [Footnote 3*: See on this Dr. Poole, _The Exchequer in the Twelfth
    Century_, Chap. III., and Haskins, _Eng. Hist. Review_, 27, 101.
    The hidage of Essex in 1130 was 2364 hides.]

The great difficulty of the early Abacists, owing to the absence of a
figure representing zero, was to place their results and operations in
the proper columns of the abacus, especially when doing a division sum.
The chief differences noticeable in their works are in the methods for
this rule. Division was either done directly or by means of differences
between the divisor and the next higher multiple of ten to the divisor.
Later Abacists made a distinction between “iron” and “golden” methods of
division. The following are examples taken from a twelfth century
treatise. In following the operations it must be remembered that a
figure asterisked represents a counter taken from the board. A zero is
obviously not needed, and the result may be written down in words.

(_a_) MULTIPLICATION. 4600 × 23.

  +-----------+-----------+
  | Thousands |           |
  +---+---+---+---+---+---+
  | H | T | U | H | T | U |
  | u | e | n | u | e | n |
  | n | n | i | n | n | i |
  | d | s | t | d | s | t |
  | r |   | s | r |   | s |
  | e |   |   | e |   |   |
  | d |   |   | d |   |   |
  | s |   |   | s |   |   |
  +---+---+---+---+---+---+
  |   |   | 4 | 6 |   |   | +Multiplicand.+
  +---+---+---+---+---+---+
  |   |   | 1 | 8 |   |   |  600 × 3.
  |   | 1 | 2 |   |   |   | 4000 × 3.
  |   | 1 | 2 |   |   |   |  600 × 20.
  |   | 8 |   |   |   |   | 4000 × 20.
  +---+---+---+---+---+---+
  | 1 |   | 5 | 8 |   |   | Total product.
  +---+---+---+---+---+---+
  |   |   |   |   | 2 | 3 | +Multiplier.+
  +---+---+---+---+---+---+

(_b_) DIVISION: DIRECT. 100,000 ÷ 20,023. Here each counter in turn is a
separate divisor.

  +-----------+-----------+
  | Thousands |           |
  +---+---+---+---+---+---+
  | H.| T.| U.| H.| T.| U.|
  +---+---+---+---+---+---+
  |   | 2 |   |   | 2 | 3 | +Divisors.+
  +---+---+---+---+---+---+
  |   | 2 |   |   |   |   | Place greatest divisor to right of dividend.
  | 1 |   |   |   |   |   | +Dividend.+
  |   | 2 |   |   |   |   | Remainder.
  |   |   |   | 1 |   |   |
  |   | 1 | 9 | 9 |   |   | Another form of same.
  |   |   |   |   | 8 |   | Product of 1st Quotient and 20.
  +---+---+---+---+---+---+
  |   | 1 | 9 | 9 | 2 |   | Remainder.
  |   |   |   |   | 1 | 2 | Product of 1st Quotient and 3.
  +---+---+---+---+---+---+
  |   | 1 | 9 | 9 |   | 8 | +Final remainder.+
  |   |   |   |   |   | 4 | Quotient.
  +---+---+---+---+---+---+

(_c_) DIVISION BY DIFFERENCES. 900 ÷ 8. Here we divide by (10-2).

  +---+---+---+-----+---+---+
  |   |   |   |  H. | T.| U.|
  +---+---+---+-----+---+---+
  |   |   |   |     |   | 2 | Difference.
  |   |   |   |     |   | 8 | Divisor.
  +---+---+---+-----+---+---+
  |   |   |   |[4*]9|   |   | +Dividend.+
  |   |   |   |[4*]1| 8 |   | Product of difference by 1st Quotient (9).
  |   |   |   |     | 2 |   | Product of difference by 2nd Quotient (1).
  +---+---+---+-----+---+---+
  |   |   |   |[4*]1|   |   | Sum of 8 and 2.
  |   |   |   |     | 2 |   | Product of difference by 3rd Quotient (1).
  |   |   |   |     |   | 4 | Product of difference by 4th Quot. (2).
  |   |   |   |     |   |   |   +Remainder.+
  +---+---+---+-----+---+---+
  |   |   |   |     |   | 2 | 4th Quotient.
  |   |   |   |     | 1 |   | 3rd Quotient.
  |   |   |   |     | 1 |   | 2nd Quotient.
  |   |   |   |     | 9 |   | 1st Quotient.
  +---+---+---+-----+---+---+
  |   |   |   |  1  | 1 | 2 | +Quotient.+ (+Total of all four.+)
  +---+---+---+-----+---+---+

    [Footnote 4*: These figures are removed at the next step.]

DIVISION. 7800 ÷ 166.

  +---------------+---------------+
  |   Thousands   |               |
  +----+----+-----+-----+----+----+
  | H. | T. |  U. |  H. | T. | U. |
  +----+----+-----+-----+----+----+
  |    |    |     |     |  3 |  4 | Differences (making 200 trial
  |    |    |     |     |    |    |   divisor).
  |    |    |     |   1 |  6 |  6 | Divisors.
  +----+----+-----+-----+----+----+
  |    |    |[4*]7|   8 |    |    | +Dividends.+
  |    |    |   1 |     |    |    | Remainder of greatest dividend.
  |    |    |     |   1 |  2 |    | Product of 1st difference (4)
  |    |    |     |     |    |    |   by 1st Quotient (3).
  |    |    |     |   9 |    |    | Product of 2nd difference (3)
  |    |    |     |     |    |    |   by 1st Quotient (3).
  +----+----+-----+-----+----+----+
  |    |    |[4*]2|   8 |  2 |    | New dividends.
  |    |    |     |   3 |  4 |    | Product of 1st and 2nd difference
  |    |    |     |     |    |    |   by 2nd Quotient (1).
  +----+----+-----+-----+----+----+
  |    |    |[4*]1|   1 |  6 |    | New dividends.
  |    |    |     |     |  2 |    | Product of 1st difference by
  |    |    |     |     |    |    |   3rd Quotient (5).
  |    |    |     |   1 |  5 |    | Product of 2nd difference by
  |    |    |     |     |    |    |   3rd Quotient (5).
  +----+----+-----+-----+----+----+
  |    |    |     |[4*]3|  3 |    | New dividends.
  |    |    |     |   1 |    |    | Remainder of greatest dividend.
  |    |    |     |     |  3 |  4 | Product of 1st and 2nd difference
  |    |    |     |     |    |    |   by 4th Quotient (1).
  +----+----+-----+-----+----+----+
  |    |    |     |   1 |  6 |  4 | +Remainder+ (less than divisor).
  |    |    |     |     |    |  1 | 4th Quotient.
  |    |    |     |     |    |  5 | 3rd Quotient.
  |    |    |     |     |  1 |    | 2nd Quotient.
  |    |    |     |     |  3 |    | 1st Quotient.
  +----+----+-----+-----+----+----+
  |    |    |     |     |  4 |  6 | +Quotient.+
  +----+----+-----+-----+----+----+

    [Footnote 4*: These figures are removed at the next step.]

DIVISION. 8000 ÷ 606.

  +-------------+-----------+
  |  Thousands  |           |
  +---+---+-----+---+---+---+
  | H.| T.|  U. | H.| T.| U.|
  +---+---+-----+---+---+---+
  |   |   |     |   | 9 |   | Difference (making 700 trial divisor).
  |   |   |     |   |   | 4 | Difference.
  |   |   |     | 6 |   | 6 | Divisors.
  +---+---+-----+---+---+---+
  |   |   |[4*]8|   |   |   | +Dividend.+
  |   |   |   1 |   |   |   | Remainder of dividend.
  |   |   |     | 9 | 4 |   | Product of difference 1 and 2 with
  |   |   |     |   |   |   |   1st Quotient (1).
  +---+---+-----+---+---+---+
  |   |   |[4*]1| 9 | 4 |   | New dividends.
  |   |   |     | 3 |   |   | Remainder of greatest dividend.
  |   |   |     |   | 9 | 4 | Product of difference 1 and 2 with 2nd
  |   |   |     |   |   |   |   Quotient (1).
  +---+---+-----+---+---+---+
  |   |   |[4*]1| 3 | 3 | 4 | New dividends.
  |   |   |     | 3 |   |   | Remainder of greatest dividend.
  |   |   |     |   | 9 | 4 | Product of difference 1 and 2 with 3rd
  |   |   |     |   |   |   |   Quotient (1).
  +---+---+-----+---+---+---+
  |   |   |     | 7 | 2 | 8 | New dividends.
  |   |   |     | 6 |   | 6 | Product of divisors by 4th Quotient (1).
  +---+---+-----+---+---+---+
  |   |   |     | 1 | 2 | 2 | +Remainder.+
  |   |   |     |   |   | 1 | 4th Quotient.
  |   |   |     |   |   | 1 | 3rd Quotient.
  |   |   |     |   |   | 1 | 2nd Quotient.
  |   |   |     |   | 1 |   | 1st Quotient.
  +---+---+-----+---+---+---+
  |   |   |     |   | 1 | 3 | +Quotient.+
  +---+---+-----+---+---+---+

    [Footnote 4*: These figures are removed at the next step.]

The chief Abacists are Gerbert (tenth century), Abbo, and Hermannus
Contractus (1054), who are credited with the revival of the art,
Bernelinus, Gerland, and Radulphus of Laon (twelfth century). We know as
English Abacists, Robert, bishop of Hereford, 1095, “abacum et lunarem
compotum et celestium cursum astrorum rimatus,” Turchillus Compotista
(Thurkil), and through him of Guilielmus R. . . . “the best of living
computers,” Gislebert, and Simonus de Rotellis (Simon of the Rolls).
They flourished most probably in the first quarter of the twelfth
century, as Thurkil’s treatise deals also with fractions. Walcher of
Durham, Thomas of York, and Samson of Worcester are also known as
Abacists.

Finally, the term Abacists came to be applied to computers by manual
arithmetic. A MS. Algorithm of the thirteenth century (Sl. 3281,
f. 6, b), contains the following passage: “Est et alius modus secundum
operatores sive practicos, quorum unus appellatur Abacus; et modus ejus
est in computando per digitos et junctura manuum, et iste utitur ultra
Alpes.”

In a composite treatise containing tracts written A.D. 1157 and 1208, on
the calendar, the abacus, the manual calendar and the manual abacus, we
have a number of the methods preserved. As an example we give the rule
for multiplication (Claud. A. IV., f. 54 vo). “Si numerus multiplicat
alium numerum auferatur differentia majoris a minore, et per residuum
multiplicetur articulus, et una differentia per aliam, et summa
proveniet.” Example, 8 × 7. The difference of 8 is 2, of 7 is 3, the
next article being 10; 7 - 2 is 5. 5 × 10 = 50; 2 × 3 = 6. 50 + 6 = 56
answer. The rule will hold in such cases as 17 × 15 where the article
next higher is the same for both, _i.e._, 20; but in such a case as
17 × 9 the difference for each number must be taken from the higher
article, _i.e._, the difference of 9 will be 11.


THE ALGORISTS.

Algorism (augrim, augrym, algram, agram, algorithm), owes its name to
the accident that the first arithmetical treatise translated from the
Arabic happened to be one written by Al-Khowarazmi in the early ninth
century, “de numeris Indorum,” beginning in its Latin form “Dixit
Algorismi. . . .” The translation, of which only one MS. is known, was
made about 1120 by Adelard of Bath, who also wrote on the Abacus and
translated with a commentary Euclid from the Arabic. It is probable that
another version was made by Gerard of Cremona (1114-1187); the number of
important works that were not translated more than once from the Arabic
decreases every year with our knowledge of medieval texts. A few lines
of this translation, as copied by Halliwell, are given on p. 72, note 2.
Another translation still seems to have been made by Johannes
Hispalensis.

Algorism is distinguished from Abacist computation by recognising seven
rules, Addition, Subtraction, Duplation, Mediation, Multiplication,
Division, and Extraction of Roots, to which were afterwards added
Numeration and Progression. It is further distinguished by the use of
the zero, which enabled the computer to dispense with the columns of the
Abacus. It obviously employs a board with fine sand or wax, and later,
as a substitute, paper or parchment; slate and pencil were also used in
the fourteenth century, how much earlier is unknown.[5*] Algorism
quickly ousted the Abacus methods for all intricate calculations, being
simpler and more easily checked: in fact, the astronomical revival of
the twelfth and thirteenth centuries would have been impossible without
its aid.

    [Footnote 5*: Slates are mentioned by Chaucer, and soon after
    (1410) Prosdocimo de Beldamandi speaks of the use of a “lapis”
    for making notes on by calculators.]

The number of Latin Algorisms still in manuscript is comparatively
large, but we are here only concerned with two--an Algorism in prose
attributed to Sacrobosco (John of Holywood) in the colophon of a Paris
manuscript, though this attribution is no longer regarded as conclusive,
and another in verse, most probably by Alexander de Villedieu (Villa
Dei). Alexander, who died in 1240, was teaching in Paris in 1209. His
verse treatise on the Calendar is dated 1200, and it is to that period
that his Algorism may be attributed; Sacrobosco died in 1256 and quotes
the verse Algorism. Several commentaries on Alexander’s verse treatise
were composed, from one of which our first tractate was translated, and
the text itself was from time to time enlarged, sections on proofs and
on mental arithmetic being added. We have no indication of the source on
which Alexander drew; it was most likely one of the translations of
Al-Khowarasmi, but he has also the Abacists in mind, as shewn by
preserving the use of differences in multiplication. His treatise, first
printed by Halliwell-Phillipps in his _Rara Mathematica_, is adapted for
use on a board covered with sand, a method almost universal in the
thirteenth century, as some passages in the algorism of that period
already quoted show: “Est et alius modus qui utitur apud Indos, et
doctor hujusmodi ipsos erat quidem nomine Algus. Et modus suus erat in
computando per quasdam figuras scribendo in pulvere. . . .” “Si
voluerimus depingere in pulvere predictos digitos secundum consuetudinem
algorismi . . .” “et sciendum est quod in nullo loco minutorum sive
secundorum . . . in pulvere debent scribi plusquam sexaginta.”


MODERN ARITHMETIC.

Modern Arithmetic begins with Leonardi Fibonacci’s treatise “de Abaco,”
written in 1202 and re-written in 1228. It is modern rather in the range
of its problems and the methods of attack than in mere methods of
calculation, which are of its period. Its sole interest as regards the
present work is that Leonardi makes use of the digital signs described
in Record’s treatise on _The arte of nombrynge by the hand_ in mental
arithmetic, calling it “modus Indorum.” Leonardo also introduces the
method of proof by “casting out the nines.”


DIGITAL ARITHMETIC.

The method of indicating numbers by means of the fingers is of
considerable age. The British Museum possesses two ivory counters marked
on one side by carelessly scratched Roman numerals IIIV and VIIII, and
on the other by carefully engraved digital signs for 8 and 9. Sixteen
seems to have been the number of a complete set. These counters were
either used in games or for the counting board, and the Museum ones,
coming from the Hamilton collection, are undoubtedly not later than the
first century. Frohner has published in the _Zeitschrift des Münchener
Alterthumsvereins_ a set, almost complete, of them with a Byzantine
treatise; a Latin treatise is printed among Bede’s works. The use of
this method is universal through the East, and a variety of it is found
among many of the native races in Africa. In medieval Europe it was
almost restricted to Italy and the Mediterranean basin, and in the
treatise already quoted (Sloane 3281) it is even called the Abacus,
perhaps a memory of Fibonacci’s work.

Methods of calculation by means of these signs undoubtedly have existed,
but they were too involved and liable to error to be much used.


THE USE OF “ARABIC” FIGURES.

It may now be regarded as proved by Bubnov that our present numerals are
derived from Greek sources through the so-called Boethian “apices,”
which are first found in late tenth century manuscripts. That they were
not derived directly from the Arabic seems certain from the different
shapes of some of the numerals, especially the 0, which stands for 5 in
Arabic. Another Greek form existed, which was introduced into Europe by
John of Basingstoke in the thirteenth century, and is figured by Matthew
Paris (V. 285); but this form had no success. The date of the
introduction of the zero has been hotly debated, but it seems obvious
that the twelfth century Latin translators from the Arabic were
perfectly well acquainted with the system they met in their Arabic text,
while the earliest astronomical tables of the thirteenth century I have
seen use numbers of European and not Arabic origin. The fact that Latin
writers had a convenient way of writing hundreds and thousands without
any cyphers probably delayed the general use of the Arabic notation.
Dr. Hill has published a very complete survey of the various forms
of numerals in Europe. They began to be common at the middle of the
thirteenth century and a very interesting set of family notes concerning
births in a British Museum manuscript, Harl. 4350 shows their extension.
The first is dated Mij^c. lviii., the second Mij^c. lxi., the third
Mij^c. 63, the fourth 1264, and the fifth 1266. Another example is given
in a set of astronomical tables for 1269 in a manuscript of Roger
Bacon’s works, where the scribe began to write MCC6. and crossed out
the figures, substituting the “Arabic” form.


THE COUNTING BOARD.

The treatise on pp. 52-65 is the only one in English known on the
subject. It describes a method of calculation which, with slight
modifications, is current in Russia, China, and Japan, to-day, though it
went out of use in Western Europe by the seventeenth century. In Germany
the method is called “Algorithmus Linealis,” and there are several
editions of a tract under this name (with a diagram of the counting
board), printed at Leipsic at the end of the fifteenth century and the
beginning of the sixteenth. They give the nine rules, but “Capitulum de
radicum extractione ad algoritmum integrorum reservato, cujus species
per ciffrales figuras ostenduntur ubi ad plenum de hac tractabitur.” The
invention of the art is there attributed to Appulegius the philosopher.

The advantage of the counting board, whether permanent or constructed by
chalking parallel lines on a table, as shown in some sixteenth-century
woodcuts, is that only five counters are needed to indicate the number
nine, counters on the lines representing units, and those in the spaces
above representing five times those on the line below. The Russian
abacus, the “tchatui” or “stchota” has ten beads on the line; the
Chinese and Japanese “Swanpan” economises by dividing the line into two
parts, the beads on one side representing five times the value of those
on the other. The “Swanpan” has usually many more lines than the
“stchota,” allowing for more extended calculations, see Tylor,
_Anthropology_ (1892), p. 314.

Record’s treatise also mentions another method of counter notation
(p. 64) “merchants’ casting” and “auditors’ casting.” These were adapted
for the usual English method of reckoning numbers up to 200 by scores.
This method seems to have been used in the Exchequer. A counting board
for merchants’ use is printed by Halliwell in _Rara Mathematica_ (p. 72)
from Sloane MS. 213, and two others are figured in Egerton 2622 f. 82
and f. 83. The latter is said to be “novus modus computandi secundum
inventionem Magistri Thome Thorleby,” and is in principle, the same as
the “Swanpan.”

The Exchequer table is described in the _Dialogus de Scaccario_ (Oxford,
1902), p. 38.




+The Earliest Arithmetics in English.+




+The Crafte of Nombrynge+

_Egerton 2622._


  [*leaf 136a]

  Hec algorism{us} ars p{re}sens dicit{ur}; in qua
  Talib{us} indor{um} fruim{ur} bis qui{n}q{ue} figuris.

  [Sidenote: A derivation of Algorism. Another derivation of the word.]

This boke is called þe boke of algorym, or Augrym aft{er} lewd{er} vse.
And þis boke tretys þe Craft of Nombryng, þe quych crafte is called also
Algorym. Ther was a kyng of Inde, þe quich heyth Algor, & he made þis
craft. And aft{er} his name he called hit algory{m}; or els anoþ{er}
cause is quy it is called Algorym, for þe latyn word of hit s.
Algorism{us} com{es} of Algos, grece, q{uid} e{st} ars, latine, craft oɳ
englis, and rides, q{uid} e{st} {nu}me{rus}, latine, A nomb{ur} oɳ
englys, inde d{icitu}r Algorism{us} p{er} addic{i}one{m} hui{us} sillabe
m{us} & subtracc{i}onem d & e, q{ua}si ars num{er}andi. ¶ fforthermor{e}
ȝe most vnd{ir}stonde þ{a}t in þis craft ben vsid teen figurys, as here
ben{e} writen for ensampul, φ 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1. ¶ Expone þe too
v{er}sus afor{e}: this p{re}sent craft ys called Algorism{us}, in þe
quych we vse teen signys of Inde. Questio. ¶ Why teɳ fyguris of Inde?
Solucio. for as I haue sayd afore þai wer{e} fonde fyrst in Inde of a
kyng{e} of þat Cuntre, þ{a}t was called Algor.

    [Headnote: Notation and Numeration.]

  [Sidenote: v{ersus} [in margin].]

  ¶ Prima sig{nifica}t unu{m}; duo ve{r}o s{e}c{un}da:
  ¶ Tercia sig{nifica}t tria; sic procede sinistre.
  ¶ Don{e}c ad extrema{m} venias, que cifra voca{tur}.


+¶ Cap{itulu}m primum de significac{i}o{n}e figurar{um}.+

  [Sidenote: Expo{sitio} v{ersus}.]
  [Sidenote: The meaning and place of the figures. Which figure is
  read first.]

In þis verse is notifide þe significac{i}on of þese figur{is}. And þus
expone the verse. Þe first signifiyth on{e}, þe secu{n}de [*leaf 136b]
signi[*]fiyth tweyn{e}, þe thryd signifiyth thre, & the fourte
signifiyth 4. ¶ And so forthe towarde þe lyft syde of þe tabul or of þe
boke þ{a}t þe figures ben{e} writen{e} in, til þat þ{o}u come to the
last figure, þ{a}t is called a cifre. ¶ Questio. In quych syde sittes þe
first figur{e}? Soluc{io}, forsothe loke quich figure is first in þe
ryȝt side of þe bok or of þe tabul, & þ{a}t same is þe first figur{e},
for þ{o}u schal write bakeward, as here, 3. 2. 6. 4. 1. 2. 5. The
fig{ur}e of 5. was first write, & he is þe first, for he sittes oɳ þe
riȝt syde. And the fig{ur}e of 3 is last. ¶ Neu{er}-þe-les wen he says
¶ P{ri}ma sig{nifica}t vnu{m} &c., þat is to say, þe first betokenes
on{e}, þe secu{n}de. 2. & fore-þ{er}-mor{e}, he vnd{ir}stondes noȝt of
þe first fig{ur}e of eu{er}y rew. ¶ But he vnd{ir}stondes þe first
figure þ{a}t is in þe nomb{ur} of þe forsayd teen figuris, þe quych is
on{e} of þ{e}se. 1. And þe secu{n}de 2. & so forth.

  [Sidenote: v{ersus} [in margin].]

  ¶ Quelib{et} illar{um} si pr{im}o limite ponas,
  ¶ Simplicite{r} se significat: si v{er}o se{cun}do,
    Se decies: sursu{m} {pr}ocedas m{u}ltiplicando.
  ¶ Na{m}q{ue} figura seque{n}s q{uam}uis signat decies pl{us}.
  ¶ Ipsa locata loco quam sign{ific}at p{ertin}ente.

  [Transcriber’s Note:

  In the following section, numerals shown in +marks+ were printed in
  a different font, possibly as facsimiles of the original MS form.]

  [Sidenote: Expo{sitio} [in margin].]
  [Sidenote: An explanation of the principles of notation. An example:
  units, tens, hundreds, thousands. How to read the number.]

¶ Expone þis v{er}se þus. Eu{er}y of þese figuris bitokens hym selfe &
no mor{e}, yf he stonde in þe first place of þe rewele / this worde
Simplicit{er} in þat verse it is no more to say but þat, & no mor{e}.
¶ If it stonde in the secu{n}de place of þe rewle, he betokens ten{e}
tymes hym selfe, as þis figur{e} 2 here 20 tokens ten tyme hym selfe,
[*leaf 137a] þat is twenty, for he hym selfe betokenes twey{ne}, & ten
tymes twene is twenty. And for he stondis oɳ þe lyft side & in þe
secu{n}de place, he betokens ten tyme hy{m} selfe. And so go forth.
¶ ffor eu{er}y fig{ure}, & he stonde aft{ur} a-noþ{er} toward the lyft
side, he schal betoken{e} ten tymes as mich mor{e} as he schul betoken &
he stode in þe place þ{ere} þat þe fig{ure} a-for{e} hym stondes. loo an
ensampull{e}. 9. 6. 3. 4. Þe fig{ure} of 4. þ{a}t hase þis schape +4.+
betokens bot hymselfe, for he stondes in þe first place. The fig{ure} of
3. þat hase þis schape +3.+ betokens ten tymes mor{e} þen he schuld & he
stode þ{ere} þ{a}t þe fig{ure} of 4. stondes, þ{a}t is thretty. The
fig{ure} of 6, þ{a}t hase þis schape +6+, betokens ten tymes mor{e} þan
he schuld & he stode þ{ere} as þe fig{ure} of +3.+ stondes, for þ{ere}
he schuld tokyn{e} bot sexty, & now he betokens ten tymes mor{e}, þat is
sex hundryth. The fig{ure} of 9. þ{a}t hase þis schape +9.+ betokens ten
tymes mor{e} þan{e} he schuld & he stode in þe place þ{ere} þe fig{ure}
of sex stondes, for þen he schuld betoken to 9. hundryth, and in þe
place þ{ere} he stondes now he betokens 9. þousande. Al þe hole nomb{ur}
is 9 thousande sex hundryth & four{e} & thretty. ¶ fforthermor{e}, when
þ{o}u schalt rede a nomb{ur} of fig{ure}, þ{o}u schalt begyn{e} at þe
last fig{ure} in the lyft side, & rede so forth to þe riȝt side as
her{e} 9. 6. 3. 4. Thou schal begyn to rede at þe fig{ure} of 9. & rede
forth þus. 9. [*leaf 137b] thousand sex hundryth thritty & foure. But
when þ{o}u schall{e} write, þ{o}u schalt be-gynne to write at þe ryȝt
side.

  ¶ Nil cifra sig{nifica}t s{ed} dat signa{re} sequenti.

  [Sidenote: The meaning and use of the cipher.]

Expone þis v{er}se. A cifre tokens noȝt, bot he makes þe fig{ure} to
betoken þat comes aft{ur} hym mor{e} þan he schuld & he wer{e} away, as
þus 1φ. her{e} þe fig{ure} of on{e} tokens ten, & yf þe cifre wer{e}
away[{1}] & no fig{ure} by-for{e} hym he schuld token bot on{e}, for
þan he sch{ul}d stonde in þe first place. ¶ And þe cifre tokens nothyng
hym selfe. for al þe nomb{ur} of þe ylke too fig{ure}s is bot ten.
¶ Questio. Why says he þat a cifre makys a fig{ure} to signifye (tyf)
mor{e} &c. ¶ I speke for þis worde significatyf, ffor sothe it may happe
aft{ur} a cifre schuld come a-noþ{ur} cifre, as þus 2φφ. And ȝet þe
secunde cifre shuld token neu{er} þe mor{e} excep he schuld kepe þe
ord{er} of þe place. and a cifre is no fig{ure} significatyf.

  +¶ Q{ua}m p{re}cedentes plus ulti{m}a significabit+ /

  [Sidenote: The last figure means more than all the others,
  since it is of the highest value.]

Expone þis v{er}se þus. Þe last figu{re} schal token mor{e} þan all{e}
þe oþ{er} afor{e}, thouȝt þ{ere} wer{e} a hundryth thousant figures
afor{e}, as þus, 16798. Þe last fig{ure} þat is 1. betokens ten
thousant. And all{e} þe oþ{er} fig{ure}s b{e}n bot betoken{e} bot sex
thousant seuyn{e} h{u}ndryth nynty & 8. ¶ And ten thousant is mor{e} þen
all{e} þat nomb{ur}, {er}go þe last figu{re} tokens mor{e} þan all þe
nomb{ur} afor{e}.

    [Headnote: The Three Kinds of Numbers]

  [*leaf 138a]

  ¶ Post p{re}dicta scias breuit{er} q{uod} tres num{er}or{um}
    Distincte species sunt; nam quidam digiti sunt;
    Articuli quidam; quidam q{uoque} compositi sunt.

¶ Capit{ulu}m 2^m de t{ri}plice divisione nu{mer}or{um}.

  [Sidenote: Digits. Articles. Composites.]

¶ The auctor of þis tretis dep{ar}tys þis worde a nomb{ur} into 3
p{ar}tes. Some nomb{ur} is called digit{us} latine, a digit in englys.
So{m}me nomb{ur} is called articul{us} latine. An Articul in englys.
Some nomb{ur} is called a composyt in englys. ¶ Expone þis v{er}se. know
þ{o}u aft{ur} þe forsayd rewles þ{a}t I sayd afore, þat þ{ere} ben thre
spices of nomb{ur}. Oon{e} is a digit, Anoþ{er} is an Articul, & þe
toþ{er} a Composyt. v{er}sus.

    [Headnote: Digits, Articles, and Composites.]

  ¶ Sunt digiti num{er}i qui cit{ra} denariu{m} s{u}nt.

  [Sidenote: What are digits.]

¶ Her{e} he telles qwat is a digit, Expone v{er}su{s} sic. Nomb{ur}s
digitus ben{e} all{e} nomb{ur}s þat ben w{i}t{h}-inne ten, as nyne,
8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1.

  ¶ Articupli decupli degito{rum}; compositi s{u}nt
    Illi qui constant ex articulis degitisq{ue}.

  [Sidenote: What are articles.]

¶ Her{e} he telles what is a composyt and what is an{e} articul. Expone
sic v{er}sus. ¶ Articulis ben[{2}] all{e} þ{a}t may be deuidyt into
nomb{urs} of ten & nothyng{e} leue ou{er}, as twenty, thretty, fourty,
a hundryth, a thousand, & such oþ{er}, ffor twenty may be dep{ar}tyt
in-to 2 nomb{ur}s of ten, fforty in to four{e} nomb{ur}s of ten, & so
forth.

  [Sidenote: What numbers are composites.]

[*leaf 138b] Compositys beɳ nomb{ur}s þat bene componyt of a digyt & of
an articull{e} as fouretene, fyftene, sextene, & such oþ{er}. ffortene
is co{m}ponyd of four{e} þat is a digit & of ten þat is an articull{e}.
ffiftene is componyd of 5 & ten, & so of all oþ{er}, what þat þai ben.
Short-lych eu{er}y nomb{ur} þat be-gynnes w{i}t{h} a digit & endyth in a
articull{e} is a composyt, as fortene bygennyng{e} by four{e} þat is a
digit, & endes in ten.

  ¶ Ergo, p{ro}posito nu{mer}o tibi scriber{e}, p{ri}mo
    Respicias quid sit nu{merus}; si digitus sit
    P{ri}mo scribe loco digitu{m}, si compositus sit
    P{ri}mo scribe loco digitu{m} post articulu{m}; sic.

  [Sidenote: How to write a number, if it is a digit; if it is a
  composite. How to read it.]

¶ here he telles how þ{o}u schalt wyrch whan þ{o}u schalt write a
nomb{ur}. Expone v{er}su{m} sic, & fac iuxta expon{ent}is sentencia{m};
whan þ{o}u hast a nomb{ur} to write, loke fyrst what man{er} nomb{ur} it
ys þ{a}t þ{o}u schalt write, whether it be a digit or a composit or an
Articul. ¶ If he be a digit, write a digit, as yf it be seuen, write
seuen & write þ{a}t digit in þe first place toward þe ryght side. If it
be a composyt, write þe digit of þe composit in þe first place & write
þe articul of þat digit in þe secunde place next toward þe lyft side. As
yf þ{o}u schal write sex & twenty. write þe digit of þe nomb{ur} in þe
first place þat is sex, and write þe articul next aft{ur} þat is twenty,
as þus 26. But whan þ{o}u schalt sowne or speke [*leaf 139a] or rede an
Composyt þou schalt first sowne þe articul & aft{ur} þe digit, as þ{o}u
seyst by þe comyn{e} speche, Sex & twenty & nouȝt twenty & sex.
v{er}sus.

  ¶ Articul{us} si sit, in p{ri}mo limite cifram,
    Articulu{m} {vero} reliq{ui}s insc{ri}be figur{is}.

  [Sidenote: How to write Articles: tens, hundreds, thousands, &c.]

¶ Here he tells how þ{o}u schal write when þe nombre þ{a}t þ{o}u hase to
write is an Articul. Expone v{er}sus sic & fac s{ecundu}m sentenciam.
Ife þe nomb{ur} þ{a}t þ{o}u hast write be an Articul, write first a
cifre & aft{ur} þe cifer write an Articull{e} þus. 2φ. fforthermor{e}
þ{o}u schalt vnd{ir}stonde yf þ{o}u haue an Articul, loke how mych he
is, yf he be w{i}t{h}-ynne an hundryth, þ{o}u schalt write bot on{e}
cifre, afore, as her{e} .9φ. If þe articull{e} be by hym-silfe & be an
hundrid euen{e}, þen schal þ{o}u write .1. & 2 cifers afor{e}, þat he
may stonde in þe thryd place, for eu{er}y fig{ure} in þe thryd place
schal token a hundrid tymes hym selfe. If þe articul be a thousant or
thousandes[{3}] and he stonde by hy{m} selfe, write afor{e} 3 cifers &
so forþ of al oþ{er}.

  ¶ Quolib{et} in nu{mer}o, si par sit p{ri}ma figura,
    Par erit & to{tu}m, quicquid sibi co{n}ti{nua}t{ur};
    Imp{ar} si fu{er}it, totu{m} tu{n}c fiet {et} impar.

  [Sidenote: To tell an even number or an odd.]

¶ Her{e} he teches a gen{er}all{e} rewle þ{a}t yf þe first fig{ure} in
þe rewle of fig{ure}s token a nomb{ur} þat is euen{e} al þ{a}t nomb{ur}
of fig{ur}ys in þat rewle schal be euen{e}, as her{e} þ{o}u may see 6.
7. 3. 5. 4. Computa & p{ro}ba. ¶ If þe first [*leaf 139b] fig{ur}e token
an nomb{ur} þat is ode, all{e} þat nomb{ur} in þat rewle schall{e} be
ode, as her{e} 5 6 7 8 6 7. Computa & p{ro}ba. v{er}sus.

  ¶ Septe{m} su{n}t partes, no{n} pl{u}res, istius artis;
  ¶ Adder{e}, subt{ra}her{e}, duplar{e}, dimidiar{e},
    Sextaq{ue} diuider{e}, s{ed} qui{n}ta m{u}ltiplicar{e};
    Radice{m} ext{ra}her{e} p{ar}s septi{m}a dicitur esse.

    [Headnote: The Seven Rules of Arithmetic.]

  [Sidenote: The seven rules.]

¶ Her{e} telles þ{a}t þ{er} beɳ .7. spices or p{ar}tes of þis craft.
The first is called addicioñ, þe secunde is called subtraccioñ. The
thryd is called duplacioñ. The 4. is called dimydicioñ. The 5. is called
m{u}ltiplicacioñ. The 6 is called diuisioñ. The 7. is called extraccioñ
of þe Rote. What all þese spices ben{e} hit schall{e} be tolde
singillati{m} in her{e} caputul{e}.

  ¶ Subt{ra}his aut addis a dext{ri}s vel mediabis:

  [Sidenote: Add, subtract, or halve, from right to left.]

Thou schal be-gynne in þe ryght side of þe boke or of a tabul. loke
wer{e} þ{o}u wul be-gynne to write latyn or englys in a boke, & þ{a}t
schall{e} be called þe lyft side of the boke, þat þ{o}u writest toward
þ{a}t side schal be called þe ryght side of þe boke. V{er}sus.

  A leua dupla, diuide, m{u}ltiplica.

  [Sidenote: Multiply or divide from left to right.]

Here he telles þe in quych side of þe boke or of þe tabul þ{o}u
schall{e} be-gyn{e} to wyrch duplacioñ, diuisioñ, and m{u}ltiplicacioñ.
Thou schal begyn{e} to worch in þe lyft side of þe boke or of þe tabul,
but yn what wyse þ{o}u schal wyrch in hym +dicetur singillatim in
seque{n}tib{us} capi{tulis} et de vtilitate cui{us}li{bet} art{is} & sic
Completur [*leaf 140.] p{ro}hemi{um} & sequit{ur} tractat{us} & p{ri}mo
de arte addic{ion}is que p{ri}ma ars est in ordine.+

    [Headnote: The Craft of Addition.]

  ++Adder{e} si nu{mer}o num{e}ru{m} vis, ordine tali
    Incipe; scribe duas p{rim}o series nu{mer}or{um}
    P{ri}ma{m} sub p{ri}ma recte pone{n}do figura{m},
    Et sic de reliq{ui}s facias, si sint tibi plures.

  [Sidenote: Four things must be known: what it is; how many rows of
  figures; how many cases; what is its result. How to set down the sum.]

¶ Her{e} by-gynnes þe craft of Addicioñ. In þis craft þ{o}u most knowe
foure thyng{es}. ¶ Fyrst þ{ou} most know what is addicioñ. Next þ{o}u
most know how mony rewles of figurys þou most haue. ¶ Next þ{o}u most
know how mony diue{r}s casys happes in þis craft of addicioñ. ¶ And next
qwat is þe p{ro}fet of þis craft. ¶ As for þe first þou most know þat
addicioñ is a castyng to-ged{ur} of twoo nomburys in-to on{e} nombr{e}.
As yf I aske qwat is twene & thre. Þ{o}u wyl cast þese twene nomb{re}s
to-ged{ur} & say þ{a}t it is fyue. ¶ As for þe secunde þou most know
þ{a}t þou schall{e} haue tweyne rewes of figures, on{e} vndur a-nother,
as her{e} þ{o}u mayst se.

  1234
  2168.

¶ As for þe thryd þou most know þ{a}t ther{e} ben foure diu{er}se cases.
As for þe forthe þ{o}u most know þ{a}t þe p{ro}fet of þis craft is to
telle what is þe hole nomb{ur} þ{a}t comes of diu{er}se nomburis. Now as
to þe texte of oure verse, he teches ther{e} how þ{o}u schal worch in
þis craft. ¶ He says yf þ{o}u wilt cast on{e} nomb{ur} to anoþ{er}
nomb{ur}, þou most by-gynne on þis wyse. ¶ ffyrst write [*leaf 140b] two
rewes of figuris & nombris so þat þ{o}u write þe first figur{e} of þe
hyer nomb{ur} euen{e} vnd{ir} the first fig{ure} of þe nether nomb{ur},
And þe secunde of þe nether nomb{ur} euen{e} vnd{ir} þe secunde of þe
hyer, & so forthe of eu{er}y fig{ur}e of both þe rewes as þ{o}u
mayst se.

  123
  234.

    [Headnote: The Cases of the Craft of Addition.]

  ¶ Inde duas adde p{ri}mas hac condic{i}one:
    Si digitus crescat ex addic{i}one prior{um};
    P{ri}mo scribe loco digitu{m}, quicu{n}q{ue} sit ille.

  [Sidenote: Add the first figures; rub out the top figure;
  write the result in its place. Here is an example.]

¶ Here he teches what þ{o}u schalt do when þ{o}u hast write too rewes of
figuris on vnder an-oþ{er}, as I sayd be-for{e}. ¶ He says þ{o}u schalt
take þe first fig{ur}e of þe heyer nomb{re} & þe fyrst figur{e} of þe
neþ{er} nombre, & cast hem to-ged{er} vp-on þis condicioɳ. Thou schal
loke qweþ{er} þe nombe{r} þat comys þ{ere}-of be a digit or no. ¶ If he
be a digit þ{o}u schalt do away þe first fig{ur}e of þe hyer nomb{re},
and write þ{ere} in his stede þat he stode Inne þe digit, þ{a}t comes of
þe ylke 2 fig{ur}es, & so wrich forth oɳ oþ{er} figures yf þ{ere} be ony
moo, til þ{o}u come to þe ende toward þe lyft side. And lede þe nether
fig{ure} stonde still eu{er}-mor{e} til þ{o}u haue ydo. ffor þ{ere}-by
þ{o}u schal wyte wheþ{er} þ{o}u hast don{e} wel or no, as I schal tell
þe aft{er}ward in þe ende of þis Chapt{er}. ¶ And loke allgate þat þou
be-gynne to worch in þis Craft of [*leaf 141a] Addi[*]cioɳ in þe ryȝt
side, here is an ensampul of þis case.

  1234
  2142.

Caste 2 to four{e} & þat wel be sex, do away 4. & write in þe same place
þe fig{ur}e of sex. ¶ And lete þe fig{ur}e of 2 in þe nether rewe stonde
stil. When þ{o}u hast do so, cast 3 & 4 to-ged{ur} and þat wel be seuen
þ{a}t is a digit. Do away þe 3, & set þ{ere} seueɳ, and lete þe neþ{er}
fig{ure} stonde still{e}, & so worch forth bakward til þ{o}u hast ydo
all to-ged{er}.

  Et si composit{us}, in limite scribe seque{n}te
  Articulum, p{ri}mo digitum; q{uia} sic iubet ordo.

  [Sidenote: Suppose it is a Composite, set down the digit,
  and carry the tens. Here is an example.]

¶ Here is þe secunde case þ{a}t may happe in þis craft. And þe case is
þis, yf of þe casting of 2 nomburis to-ged{er}, as of þe fig{ur}e of þe
hyer rewe & of þe figure of þe neþ{er} rewe come a Composyt, how schalt
þ{ou} worch. Þ{us} þ{o}u schalt worch. Thou shalt do away þe fig{ur}e of
þe hyer nomb{er} þat was cast to þe figure of þe neþ{er} nomber. ¶ And
write þ{ere} þe digit of þe Composyt. And set þe articul of þe composit
next aft{er} þe digit in þe same rewe, yf þ{ere} be no mo fig{ur}es
aft{er}. But yf þ{ere} be mo figuris aft{er} þat digit. And þere he
schall be rekend for hym selfe. And when þ{o}u schalt adde þ{a}t ylke
figure þ{a}t berys þe articull{e} ou{er} his hed to þe figur{e} vnd{er}
hym, þ{o}u schalt cast þat articul to þe figure þ{a}t hase hym ou{er}
his hed, & þ{ere} þat Articul schal tokeɳ hym selfe. lo an Ensampull
[*leaf 141b] of all.

  326
  216.

Cast 6 to 6, & þ{ere}-of wil arise twelue. do away þe hyer 6 & write
þ{ere} 2, þ{a}t is þe digit of þis composit. And þe{n} write þe
articull{e} þat is ten ou{er} þe figuris hed of twene as þ{us}.

   1
  322
  216.

Now cast þe articull{e} þ{a}t standus vpon þe fig{ur}is of twene hed to
þe same fig{ur}e, & reken þat articul bot for on{e}, and þan þ{ere} wil
arise thre. Þan cast þat thre to þe neþ{er} figure, þat is on{e}, & þat
wul be four{e}. do away þe fig{ur}e of 3, and write þ{ere} a fig{ur}e of
foure. and lete þe neþ{er} fig{ur}e stonde stil, & þan worch forth.
vn{de} {ver}sus.

  ¶ Articulus si sit, in p{ri}mo limite cifram,
  ¶ Articulu{m} v{er}o reliquis inscribe figuris,
    Vel p{er} se scribas si nulla figura sequat{ur}.

  [Sidenote: Suppose it is an Article, set down a cipher and carry
  the tens. Here is an example.]

¶ Her{e} he puttes þe thryde case of þe craft of Addicioɳ. & þe case is
þis. yf of Addiciouɳ of 2 figuris a-ryse an Articull{e}, how schal þ{o}u
do. thou most do away þe heer fig{ur}e þ{a}t was addid to þe neþ{er},
& write þ{ere} a cifre, and sett þe articuls on þe figuris hede, yf
þ{a}t þ{ere} come ony aft{er}. And wyrch þan as I haue tolde þe in þe
secunde case. An ensampull.

  25.
  15

Cast 5 to 5, þat wylle be ten. now do away þe hyer 5, & write þ{ere} a
cifer. And sette ten vpon þe figuris hed of 2. And reken it but for on
þus.] lo an Ensampull{e}

  +----+
  | 1  |
  | 2φ |
  | 15 |
  +----+

And [*leaf 142a] þan worch forth. But yf þ{ere} come no figure aft{er}
þe cifre, write þe articul next hym in þe same rewe as here

  +---+
  | 5 |
  | 5 |
  +---+

cast 5 to 5, and it wel be ten. do away 5. þat is þe hier 5. and write
þ{ere} a cifre, & write aft{er} hym þe articul as þus

  +----+
  | 1φ |
  |  5 |
  +----+

And þan þ{o}u hast done.

  ¶ Si tibi cifra sup{er}ueniens occurrerit, illa{m}
    Dele sup{er}posita{m}; fac illic scribe figura{m},
    Postea procedas reliquas addendo figuras.

  [Sidenote: What to do when you have a cipher in the top row.
  An example of all the difficulties.]

¶ Her{e} he putt{es} þe fourt case, & it is þis, þat yf þ{ere} come a
cifer in þe hier rewe, how þ{o}u schal do. þus þ{o}u schalt do. do away
þe cifer, & sett þ{ere} þe digit þ{a}t comes of þe addiciou{n} as þus

  1φφ84.
  17743

In þis ensampul ben all{e} þe four{e} cases. Cast 3 to foure, þ{a}t wol
be seueɳ. do away 4. & write þ{ere} seueɳ; þan cast 4 to þe figur{e} of
8. þ{a}t wel be 12. do away 8, & sett þ{ere} 2. þat is a digit, and
sette þe articul of þe composit, þat is ten, vpon þe cifers hed, & reken
it for hym selfe þat is on. þan cast on{e} to a cifer, & hit wull{e} be
but on, for noȝt & on makes but on{e}. þan cast 7. þ{a}t stondes vnd{er}
þat on to hym, & þat wel be 8. do away þe cifer & þat 1. & sette þ{ere}
8. þan go forthermor{e}. cast þe oþ{er} 7 to þe cifer þ{a}t stondes
ou{er} hy{m}. þ{a}t wul be bot seuen, for þe cifer betokens noȝt. do
away þe cifer & sette þ{ere} seueɳ, [*leaf 142b] & þen go forþ{er}mor{e}
& cast 1 to 1, & þat wel be 2. do away þe hier 1, & sette þ{ere} 2. þan
hast þ{o}u do. And yf þ{o}u haue wel ydo þis nomber þat is sett
her{e}-aft{er} wel be þe nomber þat schall{e} aryse of all{e} þe
addicioɳ as her{e} 27827. ¶ Sequi{tu}r alia sp{eci}es.

    [Headnote: The Craft of Subtraction.]

  ++A nu{mer}o num{er}u{m} si sit tibi demer{e} cura
    Scribe figurar{um} series, vt in addicione.

  [Sidenote: Four things to know about subtraction: the first;
  the second; the third; the fourth.]

¶ This is þe Chapt{er} of subtraccioɳ, in the quych þou most know foure
nessessary thyng{es}. the first what is subtraccioɳ. þe secunde is how
mony nombers þou most haue to subt{ra}ccioɳ, the thryd is how mony
maners of cases þ{ere} may happe in þis craft of subtraccioɳ. The fourte
is qwat is þe p{ro}fet of þis craft. ¶ As for þe first, þ{o}u most know
þ{a}t subtraccioɳ is drawyng{e} of on{e} nowmb{er} oute of anoþ{er}
nomber. As for þe secunde, þou most knowe þ{a}t þou most haue two rewes
of figuris on{e} vnd{er} anoþ{er}, as þ{o}u addyst in addicioɳ. As for
þe thryd, þ{o}u moyst know þ{a}t four{e} man{er} of diu{er}se casis mai
happe in þis craft. ¶ As for þe fourt, þou most know þ{a}t þe p{ro}fet
of þis craft is whenne þ{o}u hasse taken þe lasse nomber out of þe
mor{e} to telle what þ{ere} leues ou{er} þ{a}t. & þ{o}u most be-gynne to
wyrch in þ{is} craft in þe ryght side of þe boke, as þ{o}u diddyst in
addicioɳ. V{er}sus.

  ¶ Maiori nu{mer}o num{er}u{m} suppone minorem,
  ¶ Siue pari nu{mer}o supponat{ur} num{er}us par.

  [Sidenote: Put the greater number above the less.]

[*leaf 143a] ¶ Her{e} he telles þat þe hier nomber most be mor{e} þen þe
neþ{er}, or els eueɳ as mych. but he may not be lasse. And þe case is
þis, þou schalt drawe þe neþ{er} nomber out of þe hyer, & þou mayst not
do þ{a}t yf þe hier nomber wer{e} lasse þan þat. ffor þ{o}u mayst not
draw sex out of 2. But þ{o}u mast draw 2 out of sex. And þou maiste draw
twene out of twene, for þou schal leue noȝt of þe hier twene vn{de}
v{er}sus.

    [Headnote: The Cases of the Craft of Subtraction.]

  ¶ Postea si possis a prima subt{ra}he p{ri}ma{m}
    Scribens quod remanet.

  [Sidenote: The first case of subtraction. Here is an example.]

Her{e} is þe first case put of subtraccioɳ, & he says þou schalt begynne
in þe ryght side, & draw þe first fig{ure} of þe neþ{er} rewe out of þe
first fig{ure} of þe hier rewe. qwether þe hier fig{ur}e be mor{e} þen
þe neþ{er}, or eueɳ as mych. And þat is notified in þe vers when he says
“Si possis.” Whan þ{o}u has þus ydo, do away þe hiest fig{ur}e & sett
þ{ere} þat leues of þe subtraccioɳ, lo an Ensampull{e}

  +-----+
  | 234 |
  | 122 |
  +-----+

draw 2 out of 4. þan leues 2. do away 4 & write þ{ere} 2, & latte þe
neþ{er} figur{e} sto{n}de stille, & so go for-by oþ{er} figuris till
þ{o}u come to þe ende, þan hast þ{o}u do.

  ¶ Cifram si nil remanebit.

  [Sidenote: Put a cipher if nothing remains. Here is an example.]

¶ Her{e} he putt{es} þe secunde case, & hit is þis. yf it happe þ{a}t
qwen þ{o}u hast draw on neþ{er} fig{ure} out of a hier, & þ{er}e leue
noȝt aft{er} þe subt{ra}ccioɳ, þus [*leaf 143b] þou schalt do. þ{o}u
schall{e} do away þe hier fig{ur}e & write þ{ere} a cifer, as lo an
Ensampull

  +----+
  | 24 |
  | 24 |
  +----+

Take four{e} out of four{e} þan leus noȝt. þ{er}efor{e} do away þe hier
4 & set þ{ere} a cifer, þan take 2 out of 2, þan leues noȝt. do away þe
hier 2, & set þ{ere} a cifer, and so worch whar{e} so eu{er} þis happe.

  Sed si no{n} possis a p{ri}ma dem{er}e p{ri}ma{m}
  P{re}cedens vnu{m} de limite deme seque{n}te,
  Quod demptu{m} p{ro} denario reputabis ab illo
  Subt{ra}he to{ta}lem num{er}u{m} qu{em} p{ro}posuisti
  Quo facto sc{ri}be super quicquid remaneb{i}t.

  [Sidenote: Suppose you cannot take the lower figure from the top one,
  borrow ten; take the lower number from ten; add the answer to the top
  number. How to ‘Pay back’ the borrowed ten. Example.]

Her{e} he puttes þe thryd case, þe quych is þis. yf it happe þat þe
neþ{er} fig{ur}e be mor{e} þen þe hier fig{ur}e þat he schall{e} be draw
out of. how schall{e} þou do. þus þ{o}u schall{e} do. þou schall{e}
borro .1. oute of þe next fig{ur}e þat comes aft{er} in þe same rewe,
for þis case may neu{er} happ but yf þ{ere} come figures aft{er}. þan
þ{o}u schalt sett þat on ou{er} þe hier figur{es} hed, of the quych þou
woldist y-draw oute þe neyþ{er} fig{ur}e yf þ{o}u haddyst y-myȝt. Whane
þou hase þus ydo þou schall{e} rekene þ{a}t .1. for ten. ¶. And out of
þat ten þ{o}u schal draw þe neyþermost fig{ur}e, And all{e} þ{a}t leues
þou schall{e} adde to þe figur{e} on whos hed þat .1. stode. And þen
þ{o}u schall{e} do away all{e} þat, & sett þ{ere} all{e} that arisys of
the addicioɳ of þe ylke 2 fig{ur}is. And yf yt [*leaf 144a] happe þat þe
fig{ur}e of þe quych þ{o}u schalt borro on be hym self but 1. If þ{o}u
schalt þat on{e} & sett it vppoɳ þe oþ{er} figur{is} hed, and sett in
þ{a}t 1. place a cifer, yf þ{ere} come mony figur{es} aft{er}. lo an
Ensampul.

  +------+
  | 2122 |
  | 1134 |
  +------+

take 4 out of 2. it wyl not be, þerfor{e} borro on{e} of þe next
figur{e}, þ{a}t is 2. and sett þat ou{er} þe hed of þe fyrst 2. & rekene
it for ten. and þere þe secunde stondes write 1. for þ{o}u tokest on out
of hy{m}. þan take þe neþ{er} fig{ur}e, þat is 4, out of ten. And þen
leues 6. cast to 6 þe fig{ur}e of þat 2 þat stode vnd{er} þe hedde of 1.
þat was borwed & rekened for ten, and þat wylle be 8. do away þ{a}t 6 &
þat 2, & sette þ{ere} 8, & lette þe neþ{er} fig{ur}e stonde stille.
Whanne þ{o}u hast do þus, go to þe next fig{ur}e þ{a}t is now bot 1. but
first yt was 2, & þ{ere}-of was borred 1. þan take out of þ{a}t þe
fig{ur}e vnd{er} hym, þ{a}t is 3. hit wel not be. þer-for{e} borowe of
the next fig{ur}e, þe quych is bot 1. Also take & sett hym ou{er} þe
hede of þe fig{ure} þat þou woldest haue y-draw oute of þe nether
figure, þe quych was 3. & þou myȝt not, & rekene þ{a}t borwed 1 for ten
& sett in þe same place, of þe quych place þ{o}u tokest hy{m} of,
a cifer, for he was bot 1. Whanne þ{o}u hast þ{us} ydo, take out of þat
1. þ{a}t is rekent for ten, þe neþ{er} figure of 3. And þ{ere} leues 7.
[*leaf 144b] cast þe ylke 7 to þe fig{ur}e þat had þe ylke ten vpon his
hed, þe quych fig{ur}e was 1, & þat wol be 8. þan do away þ{a}t 1 and
þ{a}t 7, & write þ{ere} 8. & þan wyrch forth in oþ{er} figuris til þ{o}u
come to þe ende, & þan þ{o}u hast þe do. V{er}sus.

  ¶ Facque nonenarios de cifris, cu{m} remeabis
  ¶ Occ{ur}rant si forte cifre; dum demps{er}is vnum
  ¶ Postea p{ro}cedas reliquas deme{n}do figuras.

  [Sidenote: A very hard case is put. Here is an example.]

¶ Her{e} he putt{es} þe fourte case, þe quych is þis, yf it happe þat þe
neþ{er} fig{ur}e, þe quych þ{o}u schalt draw out of þe hier fig{ur}e be
mor{e} pan þe hier figur ou{er} hym, & þe next fig{ur}e of two or of
thre or of foure, or how mony þ{ere} be by cifers, how wold þ{o}u do.
Þ{o}u wost wel þ{o}u most nede borow, & þ{o}u mayst not borow of þe
cifers, for þai haue noȝt þat þai may lene or spar{e}. Ergo[{4}] how
woldest þ{o}u do. Certayɳ þus most þ{o}u do, þ{o}u most borow on of þe
next figure significatyf in þat rewe, for þis case may not happe, but yf
þ{ere} come figures significatyf aft{er} the cifers. Whan þ{o}u hast
borowede þ{a}t 1 of the next figure significatyf, sett þ{a}t on ou{er}
þe hede of þ{a}t fig{ur}e of þe quych þ{o}u wold haue draw þe neþ{er}
figure out yf þ{o}u hadest myȝt, & reken it for ten as þo{u} diddest
i{n} þe oþ{er} case her{e}-a-for{e}. Whaɳ þ{o}u hast þus y-do loke how
mony cifers þ{ere} wer{e} bye-twene þat figur{e} significatyf, & þe
fig{ur}e of þe quych þ{o}u woldest haue y-draw the [*leaf 145a] neþ{er}
figure, and of eu{er}y of þe ylke cifers make a figur{e} of 9. lo an
Ensampull{e} after.

  +-----+
  |40002|
  |10004|
  +-----+

Take 4 out of 2. it wel not be. borow 1 out of be next figure
significatyf, þe quych is 4, & þen leues 3. do away þ{a}t figur{e} of 4
& write þ{ere} 3. & sett þ{a}t 1 vppon þe fig{ur}e of 2 hede, & þan take
4 out of ten, & þan þere leues 6. Cast 6 to the fig{ur}e of 2, þ{a}t wol
be 8. do away þat 6 & write þ{er}e 8. Whan þ{o}u hast þus y-do make of
eu{er}y 0 betweyn 3 & 8 a figure of 9, & þan worch forth in goddes name.
& yf þ{o}u hast wel y-do þ{o}u[{5}] schalt haue þis nomb{er}

  +-----+
  |39998| Sic.
  |10004|
  +-----+

    [Headnote: How to prove the Subtraction.]

  ¶ Si subt{ra}cc{i}o sit b{e}n{e} facta p{ro}bar{e} valebis
  Quas s{u}btraxisti p{ri}mas addendo figuras.

  [Sidenote: How to prove a subtraction sum. Here is an example.
  He works his proof through, and brings out a result.]

¶ Her{e} he teches þe Craft how þ{o}u schalt know, whan þ{o}u hast
subt{ra}yd, wheþ{er} þou hast wel ydo or no. And þe Craft is þis, ryght
as þ{o}u subtrayd þe neþ{er} figures fro þe hier figures, ryȝt so adde
þe same neþ{er} figures to þe hier figures. And yf þ{o}u haue well
y-wroth a-for{e} þou schalt haue þe hier nombre þe same þ{o}u haddest or
þou be-gan to worch. as for þis I bade þou schulde kepe þe neþ{er}
figures stylle. lo an [*leaf 145b] Ensampull{e} of all{e} þe 4 cases
toged{re}. worche well{e} þis case

  +--------+
  |40003468|.
  |20004664|
  +--------+

And yf þou worch well{e} whan þou hast all{e} subtrayd þe þ{a}t hier
nombr{e} her{e}, þis schall{e} be þe nombre here foloyng whan þ{o}u hast
subtrayd.

  +--------+
  |39998804|.  [Sidenote: Our author makes a slip here (3 for 1).]
  |20004664|
  +--------+

And þou schalt know þ{us}. adde þe neþ{er} rowe of þe same nombre to þe
hier rewe as þus, cast 4 to 4. þat wol be 8. do away þe 4 & write þ{ere}
8. by þe first case of addicioɳ. þan cast 6 to 0 þat wol be 6. do away
þe 0, & write þere 6. þan cast 6 to 8, þ{a}t wel be 14. do away 8 &
write þ{ere} a fig{ur}e of 4, þat is þe digit, and write a fig{ur}e of
1. þ{a}t schall be-token ten. þ{a}t is þe articul vpon þe hed of 8 next
aft{er}, þan reken þ{a}t 1. for 1. & cast it to 8. þat schal be 9. cast
to þat 9 þe neþ{er} fig{ur}e vnd{er} þat þe quych is 4, & þat schall{e}
be 13. do away þat 9 & sett þ{er}e 3, & sett a figure of 1. þ{a}t schall
be 10 vpon þe next figur{is} hede þe quych is 9. by þe secu{n}de case
þ{a}t þ{o}u hadest in addicioɳ. þan cast 1 to 9. & þat wol be 10. do
away þe 9. & þat 1. And write þ{ere} a cifer. and write þe articull{e}
þat is 1. betokenyng{e} 10. vpon þe hede of þe next figur{e} toward þe
lyft side, þe quych [*leaf 146a] is 9, & so do forth tyl þ{o}u come to
þe last 9. take þe figur{e} of þat 1. þe quych þ{o}u schalt fynde ou{er}
þe hed of 9. & sett it ou{er} þe next figures hede þat schal be 3.
¶ Also do away þe 9. & set þ{ere} a cifer, & þen cast þat 1 þat stondes
vpon þe hede of 3 to þe same 3, & þ{a}t schall{e} make 4, þen caste to
þe ylke 4 the figur{e} in þe neyþ{er} rewe, þe quych is 2, and þat
schall{e} be 6. And þen schal þ{o}u haue an Ensampull{e} aȝeyɳ, loke &
se, & but þ{o}u haue þis same þ{o}u hase myse-wroȝt.

  +--------+
  |60003468|
  |20004664|
  +--------+

Sequit{ur} de duplac{i}one


    [Headnote: The Craft of Duplation.]

  ++Si vis duplar{e} num{er}u{m}, sic i{n}cipe p{rim}o
    Scribe fig{ur}ar{um} serie{m} q{ua}mcu{n}q{ue} vel{is} tu.

  [Sidenote: Four things must be known in Duplation. Here they are.
  Mind where you begin. Remember your rules.]

¶ This is the Chaptur{e} of duplacioɳ, in þe quych craft þ{o}u most haue
& know 4 thing{es}. ¶ Þe first þ{a}t þ{o}u most know is what is
duplacioɳ. þe secu{n}de is how mony rewes of fig{ur}es þ{o}u most haue
to þis craft. ¶ þe thryde is how many cases may[{6}] happe in þis craft.
¶ þe fourte is what is þe p{ro}fet of þe craft. ¶ As for þe first.
duplacioɳ is a doublyng{e} of a nombre. ¶ As for þe secu{n}de þ{o}u most
[*leaf 146b] haue on nombre or on rewe of figures, the quych called
nu{merus} dupland{us}. As for þe thrid þ{o}u most know þat 3 diu{er}se
cases may hap in þis craft. As for þe fourte. qwat is þe p{ro}fet of þis
craft, & þ{a}t is to know what a-risyȝt of a nombre I-doublyde.
¶ fforþ{er}-mor{e}, þ{o}u most know & take gode hede in quych side þ{o}u
schall{e} be-gyn in þis craft, or ellis þ{o}u mayst spyl all{e} þ{i}
lab{er} þ{er}e aboute. c{er}teyn þ{o}u schalt begyɳ in the lyft side in
þis Craft. thenke wel ou{er} þis verse. ¶ [{7}]A leua dupla, diuide,
m{u}ltiplica.[{7}] [[Subt{ra}has a{u}t addis a dext{ri}s {ve}l
medi{a}b{is}]] The sentens of þes verses afor{e}, as þ{o}u may see if
þ{o}u take hede. As þe text of þis verse, þat is to say, ¶ Si vis
duplare. þis is þe sentence. ¶ If þ{o}u wel double a nombre þus þ{o}u
most be-gynɳ. Write a rewe of figures of what nomb{re} þou welt.
v{er}sus.

  Postea p{ro}cedas p{ri}ma{m} duplando figura{m}
  Inde q{uo}d excrescit scribas vbi iusserit ordo
  Iuxta p{re}cepta tibi que dant{ur} in addic{i}one.

  [Sidenote: How to work a sum.]

¶ Her{e} he telles how þ{o}u schalt worch in þis Craft. he says, fyrst,
whan þ{o}u hast writen þe nombre þ{o}u schalt be-gyn at þe first
figur{e} in the lyft side, & doubull{e} þat fig{ur}e, & þe nombre þat
comes þ{ere}-of þ{o}u schalt write as þ{o}u diddyst in addicioɳ, as
¶ I schal telle þe in þe case. v{er}sus.

    [Headnote: The Cases of the Craft of Duplation.]

  [*leaf 147a]

  ¶ Nam si sit digitus in primo limite scribas.

  [Sidenote: If the answer is a digit, write it in the place of the
  top figure.]

¶ Her{e} is þe first case of þis craft, þe quych is þis. yf of duplacioɳ
of a figur{e} arise a digit. what schal þ{o}u do. þus þ{o}u schal do. do
away þe fig{ur}e þat was doublede, & sett þ{ere} þe diget þat comes of
þe duplacioɳ, as þus. 23. double 2, & þ{a}t wel be 4. do away þe
figur{e} of 2 & sett þ{ere} a figur{e} of 4, & so worch forth till{e}
þ{o}u come to þe ende. v{er}sus.

  ¶ Articul{us} si sit, in p{ri}mo limite cifram,
  ¶ Articulu{m} v{er}o reliquis inscribe figuris;
  ¶ Vel p{er} se scribas, si nulla figura sequat{ur}.

  [Sidenote: If it is an article, put a cipher in the place, and
  ‘carry’ the tens. If there is no figure to ‘carry’ them to, write
  them down.]

¶ Here is þe secunde case, þe quych is þis yf þ{ere} come an articull{e}
of þe duplacioɳ of a fig{ur}e þ{o}u schalt do ryȝt as þ{o}u diddyst in
addicioɳ, þat is to wete þat þ{o}u schalt do away þe figur{e} þat is
doublet & sett þ{ere} a cifer, & write þe articull{e} ou{er} þe next
figur{is} hede, yf þ{ere} be any aft{er}-warde toward þe lyft side as
þus. 25. begyn at the lyft side, and doubull{e} 2. þat wel be 4. do away
þat 2 & sett þere 4. þan doubul 5. þat wel be 10. do away 5, & sett
þ{ere} a 0, & sett 1 vpon þe next figur{is} hede þe quych is 4. & þen
draw downe 1 to 4 & þat woll{e} be 5, & þen do away þ{a}t 4 & þat 1,
& sett þ{ere} 5. for þat 1 schal be rekened in þe drawyng{e} toged{re}
for 1. wen [*leaf 147b] þou hast ydon þou schalt haue þis nomb{r}e 50.
yf þ{ere} come no figur{e} aft{er} þe fig{ur}e þ{a}t is addit, of þe
quych addicioɳ comes an articull{e}, þ{o}u schalt do away þe figur{e}
þ{a}t is dowblet & sett þ{ere} a 0. & write þe articul next by in þe
same rewe toward þe lyft syde as þus, 523. double 5 þat woll be ten. do
away þe figur{e} 5 & set þ{ere} a cifer, & sett þe articul next aft{er}
in þe same rewe toward þe lyft side, & þou schalt haue þis nombre 1023.
þen go forth & double þe oþ{er} nombers þe quych is lyȝt y-nowȝt to do.
v{er}sus.

  ¶ Compositus si sit, in limite sc{ri}be seq{uen}te
  Articulu{m}, p{ri}mo digitu{m}; q{uia} sic iubet ordo:
  Et sic de reliq{ui}s facie{n}s, si sint tibi plures.

  [Sidenote: If it is a Composite, write down the digit, and ‘carry’
  the tens. Here is an example.]

¶ Her{e} he putt{es} þe Thryd case, þe quych is þis, yf of duplacioɳ of
a fig{ur}e come a Composit. þ{o}u schalt do away þe fig{u}re þ{a}t is
doublet & set þ{ere} a digit of þe Composit, & sett þe articull{e}
ou{er} þe next figures hede, & aft{er} draw hym downe w{i}t{h} þe
figur{e} ou{er} whos hede he stondes, & make þ{ere}-of an nombre as
þ{o}u hast done afore, & yf þ{ere} come no fig{ur}e aft{er} þat digit
þat þ{o}u hast y-write, þa{n} set þe articull{e} next aft{er} hym in þe
same rewe as þus, 67: double 6 þat wel be 12, do away 6 & write þ{ere}
þe digit [*leaf 148a] of 12, þe quych is 2, and set þe articull{e} next
aft{er} toward þe lyft side in þe same rewe, for þ{ere} comes no
figur{e} aft{er}. þan dowble þat oþ{er} figur{e}, þe quych is 7, þat wel
be 14. the quych is a Composit. þen do away 7 þat þ{o}u doublet & sett
þe þe diget of hy{m}, the quych is 4, sett þe articull{e} ou{er} þe next
figur{es} hed, þe quych is 2, & þen draw to hym þat on, & make on nombre
þe quych schall{e} be 3. And þen yf þ{o}u haue wel y-do þ{o}u schall{e}
haue þis nombre of þe duplacioɳ, 134. v{er}sus.

  ¶ Si super ext{re}ma{m} nota sit monade{m} dat eid{em}
  Quod t{ibi} {con}tingat si p{ri}mo dimidiabis.

  [Sidenote: How to double the mark for one-half. This can only stand
  over the first figure.]

¶ Her{e} he says, yf ou{er} þe fyrst fig{ur}e in þe ryȝt side be such a
merke as is her{e} made, ʷ, þ{o}u schall{e} fyrst doubull{e} þe
figur{e}, the quych stondes vnd{er} þ{a}t merke, & þen þou schalt doubul
þat merke þe quych stond{es} for haluendel on. for too haluedels makes
on, & so þ{a}t wol be on. cast þ{a}t on to þat duplacioɳ of þe figur{e}
ou{er} whos hed stode þat merke, & write it in þe same place þ{ere} þat
þe figur{e} þe quych was doublet stode, as þus 23ʷ. double 3, þat wol be
6; doubul þat halue on, & þat wol be on. cast on to 6, þ{a}t wel be 7.
do away 6 & þat 1, & sett þ{ere} 7. þan hase þou do. as for þat
figur{e}, þan go [*leaf 148b] to þe oþ{er} fig{ure} & worch forth.
& þ{o}u schall neu{er} haue such a merk but ou{er} þe hed of þe furst
figure in þe ryght side. And ȝet it schal not happe but yf it were
y-halued a-for{e}, þus þ{o}u schalt vnd{er}stonde þe verse. ¶ Si sup{er}
ext{re}ma{m} &c. Et nota, talis fig{ur}a ʷ significans medietate{m},
unitat{is} veniat, {i.e.} contingat u{e}l fiat sup{er} ext{re}ma{m},
{i.e.} sup{er} p{ri}ma{m} figura{m} in ext{re}mo sic v{er}sus dextram
ars dat: {i.e.} reddit monade{m}. {i.e.} vnitate{m} eide{m}. {i.e.}
eidem note & declina{tur} hec monos, d{i}s, di, dem, &c. ¶ Quod {er}g{o}
to{tum} ho{c} dabis monade{m} note {con}ting{et}. {i.e.} eveniet tibi si
dimidiasti, {i.e.} accipisti u{e}l subtulisti medietatem alicuius unius,
in cuius principio sint figura nu{mer}u{m} denotans i{m}pare{m} p{rim}o
{i.e.} principiis.

    [Headnote: The Craft of Mediation.]

¶ Sequit{ur} de mediacione.

  ++Incipe sic, si vis alique{m} nu{me}ru{m} mediar{e}:
    Sc{ri}be figurar{um} seriem sola{m}, velut an{te}.

  [Sidenote: The four things to be known in mediation: the first the
  second; the third; the fourth. Begin thus.]

¶ In þis Chapter is taȝt þe Craft of mediaciouɳ, in þe quych craft þ{o}u
most know 4 thynges. ffurst what is mediacioɳ. the secunde how mony
rewes of figur{es} þ{o}u most haue in þe wyrchyng{e} of þis craft. þe
thryde how mony diu{er}se cases may happ in þis craft.[{8}] [[the .4.
what is þe p{ro}fet of þis craft.]] ¶ As for þe furst, þ{o}u schalt
vndurstonde þat mediacioɳ is a takyng out of halfe a nomber out of a
holle nomber, [*leaf 149a] as yf þ{o}u wolde take 3 out of 6. ¶ As for
þe secunde, þ{o}u schalt know þ{a}t þ{o}u most haue on{e} rewe of
figures, & no moo, as þ{o}u hayst in þe craft of duplacioɳ. ¶ As for the
thryd, þou most vnd{er}stonde þat 5 cases may happe in þis craft. ¶ As
for þe fourte, þou schall{e} know þat the p{ro}fet of þis craft is when
þ{o}u hast take away þe haluendel of a nomb{re} to telle qwat þer{e}
schall{e} leue. ¶ Incipe sic, &c. The sentence of þis verse is þis. yf
þ{o}u wold medye, þat is to say, take halfe out of þe holle, or halfe
out of halfe, þou most begynne þ{us}. Write on{e} rewe of figur{es} of
what nombre þou wolte, as þ{o}u dyddyst be-for{e} in þe Craft of
duplacioɳ. v{er}sus.

  ¶ Postea p{ro}cedas medians, si p{ri}ma figura
    Si par aut i{m}par videas.

  [Sidenote: See if the number is even or odd.]

¶ Her{e} he says, when þ{o}u hast write a rewe of figures, þ{o}u schalt
take hede wheþ{er} þe first figur{e} be eueɳ or odde in nombre, &
vnd{er}stonde þ{a}t he spekes of þe first figure in þe ryȝt side. And
i{n} the ryght side þ{o}u schall{e} begynne in þis Craft.

                            ¶ Quia si fu{er}it par,
  Dimidiab{is} eam, scribe{n}s quicq{ui}d remanebit:

  [Sidenote: If it is even, halve it, and write the answer in its
place.]

¶ Her{e} is the first case of þis craft, þe quych is þis, yf þe first
figur{e} be euen. þou schal take away fro þe figur{e} euen halfe, & do
away þat fig{ur}e and set þ{ere} þat leues ou{er}, as þus, 4. take
[*leaf 149b] halfe out of 4, & þan þ{ere} leues 2. do away 4 & sett
þ{ere} 2. þis is lyght y-nowȝt. v{er}sus.

    [Headnote: The Mediation of an Odd Number.]

  ¶ Impar si fu{er}it vnu{m} demas mediar{e}
    Quod no{n} p{re}sumas, s{ed} quod sup{er}est mediabis
    Inde sup{er} tractu{m} fac demptu{m} quod no{ta}t vnu{m}.

  [Sidenote: If it is odd, halve the even number less than it. Here is
  an example. Then write the sign for one-half over it. Put the mark
  only over the first figure.]

Her{e} is þe secunde case of þis craft, the quych is þis. yf þe first
figur{e} betoken{e} a nombre þat is odde, the quych odde schal not be
mediete, þen þ{o}u schalt medye þat nombre þat leues, when the odde of
þe same nomb{re} is take away, & write þat þ{a}t leues as þ{o}u diddest
in þe first case of þis craft. Whaɳ þ{o}u hayst write þat. for þ{a}t þat
leues, write such a merke as is her{e} ʷ vpon his hede, þe quych merke
schal betokeɳ halfe of þe odde þat was take away. lo an Ensampull. 245.
the first figur{e} her{e} is betokenyng{e} odde nombre, þe quych is 5,
for 5 is odde; þ{er}e-for{e} do away þat þ{a}t is odde, þe quych is 1.
þen leues 4. þen medye 4 & þen leues 2. do away 4. & sette þ{ere} 2,
& make such a merke ʷ upon his hede, þat is to say ou{er} his hede of 2
as þus. 242.ʷ And þen worch forth in þe oþ{er} figures tyll þ{o}u come
to þe ende. by þe furst case as þ{o}u schalt vnd{er}stonde þat þ{o}u
schalt [*leaf 150a] neu{er} make such a merk but ou{er} þe first
fig{ur}e hed in þe riȝt side. Wheþ{er} þe other fig{ur}es þat comyɳ
aft{er} hym be eueɳ or odde. v{er}sus.

    [Headnote: The Cases of the Craft of Mediation.]

  ¶ Si monos, dele; sit t{ibi} cifra post no{ta} supra.

  [Sidenote: If the first figure is one put a cipher.]

¶ Here is þe thryde case, þe quych yf the first figur{e} be a figur{e}
of 1. þ{o}u schalt do away þat 1 & set þ{ere} a cifer, & a merke ou{er}
þe cifer as þus, 241. do away 1, & sett þ{ere} a cifer w{i}t{h} a merke
ou{er} his hede, & þen hast þ{o}u ydo for þat 0. as þus 0ʷ þen worch
forth in þe oþer fig{ur}ys till þ{o}u come to þe ende, for it is lyght
as dyche water. vn{de} v{er}sus.

  ¶ Postea p{ro}cedas hac condic{i}one secu{n}da:
    Imp{ar} si fu{er}it hinc vnu{m} deme p{ri}ori,
    Inscribens quinque, nam denos significabit
    Monos p{re}d{ict}am.

  [Sidenote: What to do if any other figure is odd. Write a figure of
  five over the next lower number’s head. Example.]

¶ Her{e} he putt{es} þe fourte case, þe quych is þis. yf it happeɳ the
secunde figur{e} betoken odde nombre, þou schal do away on of þat odde
nombre, þe quych is significatiue by þ{a}t figure 1. þe quych 1 schall
be rekende for 10. Whan þ{o}u hast take away þ{a}t 1 out of þe nombre
þ{a}t is signifiede by þat figur{e}, þ{o}u schalt medie þ{a}t þat leues
ou{er}, & do away þat figur{e} þat is medied, & sette in his styde halfe
of þ{a}t nombre. ¶ Whan þ{o}u hase so done, þ{o}u schalt write [*leaf
150b] a figure of 5 ou{er} þe next figur{es} hede by-for{e} toward þe
ryȝt side, for þat 1, þe quych made odd nombr{e}, schall stonde for ten,
& 5 is halfe of 10; so þ{o}u most write 5 for his haluendell{e}. lo an
Ensampull{e}, 4678. begyɳ in þe ryȝt side as þ{o}u most nedes. medie 8.
þen þ{o}u schalt leue 4. do away þat 8 & sette þ{ere} 4. þen out of 7.
take away 1. þe quych makes odde, & sett 5. vpon þe next figur{es} hede
afor{e} toward þe ryȝt side, þe quych is now 4. but afor{e} it was 8.
for þat 1 schal be rekenet for 10, of þe quych 10, 5 is halfe, as þou
knowest wel. Whan þ{o}u hast þus ydo, medye þ{a}t þe quych leues aft{er}
þe takying{e} away of þat þat is odde, þe quych leuyng{e} schall{e} be
3; do away 6 & sette þ{er}e 3, & þou schalt haue such a nombre

     5
  4634.

aft{er} go forth to þe next fig{ur}e, & medy þat, & worch forth, for it
is lyȝt ynovȝt to þe c{er}tayɳ.

                      ¶ Si v{er}o s{e}c{un}da dat vnu{m}.
    Illa deleta, sc{ri}bat{ur} cifra; p{ri}ori
  ¶ Tradendo quinque pro denario mediato;
    Nec cifra sc{ri}batur, nisi dei{n}de fig{ur}a seq{u}at{ur}:
    Postea p{ro}cedas reliq{ua}s mediando figuras
    Vt sup{ra} docui, si sint tibi mille figure.

  [Sidenote: If the second figure is one, put a cipher, and write
  five over the next figure. How to halve fourteen.]

¶ Her{e} he putt{es} þe 5 case, þe quych is [*leaf 151a] þis: yf þe
secunde figur{e} be of 1, as þis is here 12, þou schalt do away þat 1 &
sett þ{ere} a cifer. & sett 5 ou{er} þe next fig{ur}e hede afor{e}
toward þe riȝt side, as þou diddyst afor{e}; & þat 5 schal be haldel of
þat 1, þe quych 1 is rekent for 10. lo an Ensampull{e}, 214. medye 4.
þ{a}t schall{e} be 2. do away 4 & sett þ{ere} 2. þe{n} go forth to þe
next figur{e}. þe quych is bot 1. do away þat 1. & sett þ{ere} a cifer.
& set 5 vpon þe figur{es} hed afor{e}, þe quych is nowe 2, & þen þou
schalt haue þis no{m}b{re}

    5
  202,

þen worch forth to þe nex fig{ur}e. And also it is no mayst{er}y yf
þ{ere} come no figur{e} after þat on is medyet, þ{o}u schalt write no 0.
ne nowȝt ellis, but set 5 ou{er} þe next fig{ur}e afor{e} toward þe
ryȝt, as þus 14. medie 4 then leues 2, do away 4 & sett þ{ere} 2. þen
medie 1. þe q{ui}ch is rekende for ten, þe halue{n}del þ{ere}-of wel be
5. sett þ{a}t 5 vpon þe hede of þ{a}t figur{e}, þe quych is now 2, & do
away þ{a}t 1, & þou schalt haue þis nombre yf þ{o}u worch wel,

   5
  2.

vn{de} v{er}sus.

    [Headnote: How to prove the Mediation.]

  ¶ Si mediacio sit b{e}n{e} f{ac}ta p{ro}bar{e} valeb{is}
  ¶ Duplando num{er}u{m} que{m} p{ri}mo di{m}ediasti

  [Sidenote: How to prove your mediation. First example. The second.
  The third example. The fourth example. The fifth example.]

¶ Her{e} he telles þe how þou schalt know wheþ{er} þou hase wel ydo or
no. doubul [*leaf 151b] þe nombre þe quych þ{o}u hase mediet, and yf
þ{o}u haue wel y-medyt after þe dupleacioɳ, þou schalt haue þe same
nombre þat þ{o}u haddyst in þe tabull{e} or þ{o}u began to medye, as
þus. ¶ The furst ensampull{e} was þis. 4. þe quych I-mediet was laft 2,
þe whych 2 was write in þe place þ{a}t 4 was write afor{e}. Now
doubull{e} þat 2, & þ{o}u schal haue 4, as þ{o}u hadyst afor{e}. þe
secunde Ensampull{e} was þis, 245. When þ{o}u haddyst mediet all{e} þis
nomb{re}, yf þou haue wel ydo þou schalt haue of þ{a}t mediacioɳ þis
nombre, 122ʷ. Now doubull{e} þis nombre, & begyn in þe lyft side;
doubull{e} 1, þat schal be 2. do away þat 1 & sett þ{ere} 2. þen
doubull{e} þ{a}t oþ{er} 2 & sett þ{ere} 4, þen doubull{e} þat oþ{er} 2,
& þat wel be 4. þe{n} doubul þat merke þat stondes for halue on. & þat
schall{e} be 1. Cast þat on to 4, & it schall{e} be 5. do away þat 2 &
þat merke, & sette þ{ere} 5, & þen þ{o}u schal haue þis nombre 245. &
þis wos þe same nombur þ{a}t þ{o}u haddyst or þ{o}u began to medye, as
þ{o}u mayst se yf þou take hede. The nombre þe quych þou haddist for an
Ensampul in þe 3 case of mediacioɳ to be mediet was þis 241. whan þ{o}u
haddist medied all{e} þis nombur truly [*leaf 152a] by eu{er}y figur{e},
þou schall haue be þ{a}t mediacioɳ þis nombur 120ʷ. Now dowbul þis
nomb{ur}, & begyn in þe lyft side, as I tolde þe in þe Craft of
duplacioɳ. þus doubull{e} þe fig{ur}e of 1, þat wel be 2. do away þat 1
& sett þ{ere} 2, þen doubul þe next figur{e} afore, the quych is 2,
& þat wel be 4; do away 2 & set þ{ere} 4. þen doubul þe cifer, & þat wel
be noȝt, for a 0 is noȝt. And twyes noȝt is but noȝt. þ{ere}for{e}
doubul the merke aboue þe cifers hede, þe quych betokenes þe halue{n}del
of 1, & þat schal be 1. do away þe cifer & þe merke, & sett þ{ere} 1,
& þen þ{o}u schalt haue þis nombur 241. And þis same nombur þ{o}u
haddyst afore or þ{o}u began to medy, & yf þ{o}u take gode hede. ¶ The
next ensampul þat had in þe 4 case of mediacioɳ was þis 4678. Whan þ{o}u
hast truly ymedit all{e} þis nombur fro þe begynnyng{e} to þe endyng{e},
þ{o}u schalt haue of þe mediacioɳ þis nombur

    5
 2334.

Now doubul this nombur & begyn in þe lyft side, & doubull{e} 2 þat schal
be 4. do away 2 and sette þere 4; þen doubul{e} 3, þ{a}t wol be 6; do
away 3 & sett þ{ere} 6, þen doubul þat oþ{er} 3, & þat wel be 6; do away
3 & set þ{ere} [*leaf 152b] 6, þen doubul þe 4, þat welle be 8; þen
doubul 5. þe quych stondes ou{er} þe hed of 4, & þat wol be 10; cast 10
to 8, & þ{a}t schal be 18; do away 4 & þat 5, & sett þ{ere} 8, & sett
that 1, þe quych is an articul of þe Composit þe quych is 18, ou{er} þe
next figur{es} hed toward þe lyft side, þe quych is 6. drav þ{a}t 1 to
6, þe quych 1 in þe dravyng schal be rekente bot for 1, & þ{a}t 1 &
þ{a}t 6 togedur wel be 7. do away þat 6 & þat 1. the quych stondes
ou{er} his hede, & sett ther 7, & þen þou schalt haue þis nombur 4678.
And þis same nombur þ{o}u hadyst or þ{o}u began to medye, as þ{o}u mayst
see in þe secunde Ensampul þat þou had in þe 4 case of mediacioɳ, þat
was þis: when þ{o}u had mediet truly all{e} the nombur, a p{ri}ncipio
usque ad fine{m}. þ{o}u schalt haue of þat mediacioɳ þis nombur

    5
  102.

Now doubul 1. þat wel be 2. do away 1 & sett þ{ere} 2. þen doubul 0.
þ{a}t will be noȝt. þ{ere}for{e} take þe 5, þe quych stondes ou{er} þe
next figur{es} hed, & doubul it, & þat wol be 10. do away þe 0 þat
stondes betwene þe two fig{u}r{i}s, & sette þ{ere} in his stid 1, for
þ{a}t 1 now schal stonde in þe secunde place, wher{e} he schal betoken
10; þen doubul 2, þat wol be 4. do away 2 & sett þere 4. & [*leaf 153a]
þou schal haue þus nombur 214. þis is þe same nu{m}bur þat þ{o}u hadyst
or þ{o}u began to medye, as þ{o}u may see. And so do eu{er} mor{e}, yf
þ{o}u wil knowe wheþ{er} þou hase wel ymedyt or no. ¶. doubull{e} þe
nu{m}bur þat comes aft{er} þe mediaciouɳ, & þ{o}u schal haue þe same
nombur þ{a}t þ{o}u hadyst or þ{o}u began to medye, yf þ{o}u haue welle
ydo. or els doute þe noȝt, but yf þ{o}u haue þe same, þ{o}u hase faylide
in þ{i} Craft.

+Sequitur de multiplicatione.+


    [Headnote: The Craft of Multiplication.]

    [Headnote: To write down a Multiplication Sum.]

  ++Si tu p{er} num{er}u{m} num{er}u{m} vis m{u}ltiplicar{e}
    Scribe duas q{ua}scu{nque} velis series nu{me}ror{um}
    Ordo s{er}vet{ur} vt vltima m{u}ltiplicandi
    Ponat{ur} sup{er} ant{er}iorem multiplicant{is}
    A leua reliq{u}e sint scripte m{u}ltiplicantes.

  [Sidenote: Four things to be known of Multiplication: the first:
  the second: the third: the fourth. How to set down the sum. Two
  sorts of Multiplication: mentally, and on paper.]

¶ Her{e} be-gynnes þe Chapt{r}e of m{u}ltiplicatioɳ, in þe quych þou
most know 4 thynges. ¶ Ffirst, qwat is m{u}ltiplicacioɳ. The secunde,
how mony cases may hap in multiplicacioɳ. The thryde, how mony rewes of
figur{es} þ{ere} most be. ¶ The 4. what is þe p{ro}fet of þis craft.
¶ As for þe first, þ{o}u schal vnd{er}stonde þat m{u}ltiplicacioɳ is a
bryngyng{e} to-ged{er} of 2 thyng{es} in on nombur, þe quych on nombur
{con}tynes so mony tymes on, howe [*leaf 153b] mony tymes þ{ere} ben
vnytees in þe nowmb{re} of þat 2, as twyes 4 is 8. now her{e} ben þe 2
nomb{er}s, of þe quych too nowmbr{e}s on is betokened be an adu{er}be,
þe quych is þe worde twyes, & þis worde thryes, & þis worde four{e}
sythes,[{9}] [[& þis wordes fyue sithe & sex sythes.]] & so furth of
such other lyke wordes. ¶ And tweyn nombres schal be tokenyde be a
nowne, as þis worde four{e} showys þes tweyɳ nombres y-broth in-to on
hole nombur, þat is 8, for twyes 4 is 8, as þ{o}u wost wel. ¶ And þes
nomb{re} 8 conteynes as oft tymes 4 as þ{ere} ben vnites in þ{a}t other
nomb{re}, þe quych is 2, for in 2 ben 2 vnites, & so oft tymes 4 ben in
8, as þ{o}u wottys wel. ¶ ffor þe secu{n}de, þ{o}u most know þat þ{o}u
most haue too rewes of figures. ¶ As for þe thryde, þ{o}u most know
þ{a}t 8 man{er} of diu{er}se case may happe in þis craft. The p{ro}fet
of þis Craft is to telle when a nomb{re} is m{u}ltiplyed be a noþ{er},
qwat co{m}mys þ{ere} of. ¶ fforthermor{e}, as to þe sentence of our{e}
verse, yf þ{o}u wel m{u}ltiply a nombur be a-noþ{er} nomb{ur}, þou
schalt write [*leaf 154a] a rewe of figures of what nomb{ur}s so eu{er}
þ{o}u welt, & þat schal be called Num{erus} m{u}ltiplicand{us}, Anglice,
þe nomb{ur} the quych to be m{u}ltiplied. þen þ{o}u schalt write
a-nother rewe of figur{e}s, by þe quych þ{o}u schalt m{u}ltiplie the
nombre þat is to be m{u}ltiplied, of þe quych nomb{ur} þe furst fig{ur}e
schal be write vnd{er} þe last figur{e} of þe nomb{ur}, þe quych is to
be m{u}ltiplied. And so write forthe toward þe lyft side, as her{e} you
may se,

  +----------+
  |    67324 |
  | 1234     |
  +----------+

And þis on{e} nomb{ur} schall{e} be called nu{meru}s m{u}ltiplicans.
An{gli}ce, þe nomb{ur} m{u}ltipliyng{e}, for he schall{e} m{u}ltiply þe
hyer nounb{ur}, as þus on{e} tyme 6. And so forth, as I schal telle the
aft{er}warde. And þou schal begyn in þe lyft side. ¶ ffor-þ{ere}-more
þou schalt vndurstonde þat þ{ere} is two man{ur}s of m{u}ltiplicacioɳ;
one ys of þe wyrchyng{e} of þe boke only in þe mynde of a mon. fyrst he
teches of þe fyrst man{er} of duplacioɳ, þe quych is be wyrchyng{e} of
tabuls. Aft{er}warde he wol teche on þe secunde man{er}. vn{de}
v{er}sus.

    [Headnote: To multiply one Digit by another.]

    In digitu{m} cures digitu{m} si duc{er}e ma{i}or
  [*leaf 154b.]
    P{er} qua{n}tu{m} distat a denis respice debes
  ¶ Namq{ue} suo decuplo totiens deler{e} mi{n}ore{m}
    Sitq{ue} tibi nu{meru}s veniens exinde patebit.

  [Sidenote: How to multiply two digits. Subtract the greater from ten;
  take the less so many times from ten times itself. Example.]

¶ Her{e} he teches a rewle, how þ{o}u schalt fynde þe nounb{r}e þat
comes by þe m{u}ltiplicacioɳ of a digit be anoþ{er}. loke how mony
[vny]tes ben. bytwene þe mor{e} digit and 10. And reken ten for on
vnite. And so oft do away þe lasse nounbre out of his owne decuple, þat
is to say, fro þat nounb{r}e þat is ten tymes so mych is þe nounb{re}
þ{a}t comes of þe m{u}ltiplicacioɳ. As yf þ{o}u wol m{u}ltiply 2 be 4.
loke how mony vnitees ben by-twene þe quych is þe mor{e} nounb{re},
& be-twene ten. C{er}ten þ{ere} wel be vj vnitees by-twene 4 & ten.
yf þ{o}u reken þ{ere} w{i}t{h} þe ten þe vnite, as þou may se. so mony
tymes take 2. out of his decuple, þe quych is 20. for 20 is þe decuple
of 2, 10 is þe decuple of 1, 30 is þe decuple of 3, 40 is þe decuple of
4, And þe oþ{er} digetes til þ{o}u come to ten; & whan þ{o}u hast y-take
so mony tymes 2 out of twenty, þe quych is sex tymes, þ{o}u schal leue 8
as þ{o}u wost wel, for 6 times 2 is twelue. take [1]2 out of twenty,
& þ{ere} schal leue 8. bot yf bothe þe digett{es} [*leaf 155a] ben
y-lyech mych as her{e}. 222 or too tymes twenty, þen it is no fors quych
of hem tweyn þ{o}u take out of here decuple. als mony tymes as þ{a}t is
fro 10. but neu{er}-þe-lesse, yf þ{o}u haue hast to worch, þ{o}u schalt
haue her{e} a tabul of figures, wher{e}-by þ{o}u schalt se a-nonɳ ryght
what is þe nounbre þ{a}t comes of þe multiplicacioɳ of 2 digittes. þus
þ{o}u schalt worch in þis fig{ur}e.

  [Sidenote: Better use this table, though. How to use it. The way to
  use the Multiplication table.]

   1|
  -----
   2| 4|
  --------
   3| 6| 9|
  -----------
   4| 8|12|16|
  --------------
   5|10|15|20|25|
  -----------------
   6|12|18|24|30|36|
  --------------------
   7|14|21|28|35|42|49|
  -----------------------
   8|16|24|32|40|48|56|64|
  --------------------------
   9|18|27|36|45|54|63|72|81|
  ----------------------------
   1| 2| 3| 4| 5| 6| 7| 8| 9|
  ----------------------------

yf þe fig{ur}e, þe quych schall{e} be m{u}ltiplied, be euen{e} as mych
as þe diget be, þe quych þat oþ{er} figur{e} schal be m{u}ltiplied,
as two tymes twayɳ, or thre tymes 3. or sych other. loke qwer{e} þat
fig{ur}e sittes in þe lyft side of þe t{ri}angle, & loke qwer{e} þe
diget sittes in þe neþ{er} most rewe of þe triangle. & go fro hym
vpwarde in þe same rewe, þe quych rewe gose vpwarde til þ{o}u come
agaynes þe oþ{er} digette þat sittes in þe lyft side of þe t{ri}angle.
And þat nounbre, þe quych þou [*leaf 155b] fyn[*]des þ{ere} is þe
nounbre þat comes of the m{u}ltiplicacioɳ of þe 2 digittes, as yf þou
wold wete qwat is 2 tymes 2. loke quer{e} sittes 2 in þe lyft side i{n}
þe first rewe, he sittes next 1 in þe lyft side al on hye, as þ{o}u may
se; þe[{n}] loke qwer{e} sittes 2 in þe lowyst rewe of þe t{ri}angle,
& go fro hym vpwarde in þe same rewe tyll{e} þou come a-ȝenenes 2 in þe
hyer place, & þer þou schalt fynd ywrite 4, & þat is þe nounb{r}e þat
comes of þe multiplicacioɳ of two tymes tweyn is 4, as þow wotest
well{e}. yf þe diget. the quych is m{u}ltiplied, be mor{e} þan þe
oþ{er}, þou schalt loke qwer{e} þe mor{e} diget sittes in þe lowest rewe
of þe t{ri}angle, & go vpwarde in þe same rewe tyl[{10}] þ{o}u come
a-nendes þe lasse diget in the lyft side. And þ{ere} þ{o}u schalt fynde
þe no{m}b{r}e þat comes of þe m{u}ltiplicacioɳ; but þ{o}u schalt
vnd{er}stonde þat þis rewle, þe quych is in þis v{er}se. ¶ In digitu{m}
cures, &c., noþ{er} þis t{ri}angle schall{e} not s{er}ue, bot to fynde
þe nounbres þ{a}t comes of the m{u}ltiplicacioɳ þat comes of 2 articuls
or {com}posites, þe nedes no craft but yf þou wolt m{u}ltiply in þi
mynde. And [*leaf 156a] þere-to þou schalt haue a craft aft{er}warde,
for þou schall wyrch w{i}t{h} digettes in þe tables, as þou schalt know
aft{er}warde. v{er}sus.

    [Headnote: To multiply one Composite by another.]

  ¶ Postea p{ro}cedas postrema{m} m{u}ltiplica{n}do
    [Recte multiplicans per cu{n}ctas i{n}feriores]
    Condic{i}onem tamen t{a}li q{uod} m{u}ltiplicant{es}
    Scribas in capite quicq{ui}d p{ro}cesserit inde
    Sed postq{uam} fuit hec m{u}ltiplicate fig{ur}e
    Anteriorent{ur} serei m{u}ltiplica{n}t{is}
    Et sic m{u}ltiplica velut isti m{u}ltiplicasti
    Qui sequit{ur} nu{mer}u{m} sc{ri}ptu{m} quiscu{n}q{ue} figur{is}.

  [Sidenote: How to multiply one number by another. Multiply the ‘last’
  figure of the higher by the ‘first’ of the lower number. Set the
  answer over the first of the lower: then multiply the second of the
  lower, and so on. Then antery the lower number: as thus. Now multiply
  by the last but one of the higher: as thus. Antery the figures again,
  and multiply by five: Then add all the figures above the line: and
  you will have the answer.]

¶ Her{e} he teches how þ{o}u schalt wyrch in þis craft. þou schalt
m{ul}tiplye þe last figur{e} of þe nombre, and quen þ{o}u hast so ydo
þou schalt draw all{e} þe figures of þe neþ{er} nounbre mor{e} taward þe
ryȝt side, so qwe{n} þ{o}u hast m{u}ltiplyed þe last figur{e} of þe
heyer nounbre by all{e} þe neþ{er} figures. And sette þe nounbir þat
comes þer-of ou{er} þe last figur{e} of þe neþ{er} nounb{re}, & þen þou
schalt sette al þe oþ{er} fig{ur}es of þe neþ{er} nounb{re} mor{e}
ner{e} to þe ryȝt side. ¶ And whan þou hast m{u}ltiplied þat figur{e}
þat schal be m{u}ltiplied þe next aft{er} hym by al þe neþ{er} figures.
And worch as þou dyddyst afor{e} til [*leaf 156b] þou come to þe ende.
And þou schalt vnd{er}stonde þat eu{er}y figur{e} of þe hier nounb{re}
schal be m{u}ltiplied be all{e} þe figur{e}s of the neþ{er} nounbre,
yf þe hier nounb{re} be any figur{e} þen on{e}. lo an Ensampul her{e}
folowyng{e}.

  +------+
  |  2465|.
  |232   |
  +------+

þou schalt begyne to m{u}ltiplye in þe lyft side. M{u}ltiply 2 be 2, and
twyes 2 is 4. set 4 ou{er} þe hed of þ{a}t 2, þen m{u}ltiplie þe same
hier 2 by 3 of þe nether nounbre, as thryes 2 þat schal be 6. set 6
ou{er} þe hed of 3, þan m{u}ltiplie þe same hier 2 by þat 2 þe quych
stondes vnd{er} hym, þ{a}t wol be 4; do away þe hier 2 & sette þ{ere} 4.
¶ Now þ{o}u most antery þe nether nounbre, þat is to say, þ{o}u most
sett þe neþ{er} nounbre more towarde þe ryȝt side, as þus. Take þe
neþ{er} 2 toward þe ryȝt side, & sette it eueɳ vnd{er} þe 4 of þe hyer
nounb{r}e, & ant{er}y all{e} þe figures þat comes aft{er} þat 2, as þus;
sette 2 vnd{er} þe 4. þen sett þe figur{e} of 3 þ{ere} þat þe figure of
2 stode, þe quych is now vndur þ{a}t 4 in þe hier nounbre; þen sett þe
oþer figur{e} of 2, þe quych is þe last fig{ur}e toward þe lyft side of
þe neþ{er} nomb{er} þ{ere} þe figur{e} of 3 stode. þen þ{o}u schalt haue
such a nombre.

  +------+
  |464465|
  | 232  |
  +------+

[*leaf 157a] ¶ Now m{u}ltiply 4, þe quych comes next aft{er} 6, by þe
last 2 of þe neþ{er} nounbur toward þe lyft side. as 2 tymes 4, þat wel
be 8. sette þat 8 ou{er} þe figure the quych stondes ou{er} þe hede of
þat 2, þe quych is þe last figur{e} of þe neþ{er} nounbre; þan multiplie
þat same 4 by 3, þat comes in þe neþ{er} rewe, þat wol be 12. sette þe
digit of þe composyt ou{er} þe figure þe quych stondes ou{er} þe hed of
þat 3, & sette þe articule of þis co{m}posit ou{er} al þe figures þat
stondes ou{er} þe neþ{er} 2 hede. þen m{u}ltiplie þe same 4 by þe 2 in
þe ryȝt side in þe neþ{er} nounbur, þat wol be 8. do away 4. & sette
þ{ere} 8. Eu{er} mor{e} qwen þ{o}u m{u}ltiplies þe hier figur{e} by þat
figur{e} þe quych stondes vnd{er} hym, þou schalt do away þat hier
figur{e}, & sett þer þat nounbre þe quych comes of m{u}ltiplicacioɳ of
ylke digittes. Whan þou hast done as I haue byde þe, þ{o}u schalt haue
suych an ord{er} of figur{e} as is her{e},

  +--------+
  | 1      |.
  | 82     |
  |4648[65]|
  | 232    |
  +--------+

þen take and ant{er}y þi neþ{er} figures. And sett þe fyrst fig{ur}e of
þe neþ{er} figures[{11}] vndre be figur{e} of 6. ¶ And draw al þe oþ{er}
figures of þe same rewe to hym-warde, [*leaf 157b] as þ{o}u diddyst
afore. þen m{u}ltiplye 6 be 2, & sett þat þe quych comes ou{er}
þ{ere}-of ou{er} al þe oþ{er} figures hedes þat stondes ou{er} þat 2.
þen m{u}ltiply 6 be 3, & sett all{e} þat comes þ{ere}-of vpon all{e} þe
figur{e}s hedes þat standes ou{er} þat 3; þa{n} m{u}ltiplye 6 be 2, þe
quych stondes vnd{er} þat 6, þen do away 6 & write þ{ere} þe digitt of
þe composit þat schal come þ{ere}of, & sette þe articull ou{er} all{e}
þe figures þat stondes ou{er} þe hede of þat 3 as her{e},

  +------+
  | 11   |
  | 121  |
  | 828  |
  |464825|
  |  232 |
  +------+

þen ant{er}y þi figures as þou diddyst afor{e}, and m{u}ltipli 5 be 2,
þat wol be 10; sett þe 0 ou{er} all þe figures þ{a}t stonden ou{er} þat
2, & sett þ{a}t 1. ou{er} the next figures hedes, all{e} on hye towarde
þe lyft side. þen m{u}ltiplye 5 be 3. þat wol be 15, write 5 ou{er} þe
figures hedes þat stonden ou{er} þ{a}t 3, & sett þat 1 ou{er} þe next
figur{e}s hedes toward þe lyft side. þen m{u}ltiplye 5 be 2, þat wol be
10. do away þat 5 & sett þ{ere} a 0, & sett þat 1 ou{er} þe figures
hedes þat stonden ou{er} 3. And þen þou schalt haue such a nounbre as
here stondes aftur.[*leaf 158a]

  +------+
  |  11  |
  | 1101 |
  | 1215 |
  | 82820|
  |4648  |
  |   232|
  +------+

¶ Now draw all{e} þese figures downe toged{er} as þus, 6.8.1. & 1 draw
to-gedur; þat wolle be 16, do away all{e} þese figures saue 6. lat hym
stonde, for þow þ{o}u take hym away þou most write þer þe same aȝene.
þ{ere}for{e} late hym stonde, & sett 1 ou{er} þe figur{e} hede of 4
toward þe lyft side; þen draw on to 4, þat woll{e} be 5. do away þat 4 &
þat 1, & sette þ{ere} 5. þen draw 4221 & 1 toged{ur}, þat wol be 10. do
away all{e} þat, & write þere þat 4 & þat 0, & sett þat 1 ou{er} þe next
figur{es} hede toward þe lyft side, þe quych is 6. þen draw þat 6 & þat
1 togedur, & þat wolle be 7; do away 6 & sett þ{ere} 7, þen draw 8810 &
1, & þat wel be 18; do away all{e} þe figures þ{a}t stondes ou{er} þe
hede of þat 8, & lette 8 stonde stil, & write þat 1 ou{er} þe next
fig{u}r{is} hede, þe quych is a 0. þen do away þat 0, & sett þ{ere} 1,
þe quych stondes ou{er} þe 0. hede. þen draw 2, 5, & 1 toged{ur}, þat
woll{e} be 8. þen do away all{e} þat, & write þ{ere} 8. ¶ And þen þou
schalt haue þis nounbre, 571880.

    [Headnote: The Cases of this Craft.]

  [*leaf 158b]

  ¶ S{ed} cu{m} m{u}ltiplicabis, p{ri}mo sic e{st} op{er}andu{m},
    Si dabit articulu{m} tibi m{u}ltiplicacio solu{m};
    P{ro}posita cifra su{m}ma{m} t{ra}nsferre meme{n}to.

  [Sidenote: What to do if the first multiplication results in an
  article.]

¶ Her{e} he puttes þe fyrst case of þis craft, þe quych is þis: yf
þ{ere} come an articulle of þe m{u}ltiplicacioɳ ysette befor{e} the
articull{e} in þe lyft side as þus

  +---+
  | 51|.
  |23 |
  +---+

multiplye 5 by 2, þat wol be 10; sette ou{er} þe hede of þat 2 a 0,
& sett þat on, þat is þe articul, in þe lyft side, þat is next hym, þen
þ{o}u schalt haue þis nounbre

  +----+
  |1051|.
  | 23 |
  +----+

¶ And þen worch forth as þou diddist afore. And þ{o}u schalt
vnd{er}stonde þat þ{o}u schalt write no 0. but whan þat place where þou
schal write þat 0 has no figure afore hy{m} noþ{er} aft{er}. v{er}sus.

  ¶ Si aut{em} digitus excreu{er}it articul{us}q{ue}.
    Articul{us}[{12}] sup{ra}p{osit}o digito salit vltra.

  [Sidenote: What to do if the result is a composite number.]

¶ Her{e} is þe secunde case, þe quych is þis: yf hit happe þat þ{ere}
come a composyt, þou schalt write þe digitte ou{er} þe hede of þe
neþ{er} figur{e} by þe quych þ{o}u multipliest þe hier figure; and sett
þe articull{e} next hym toward þe lyft side, as þou diddyst afore, as
þ{us}

  +---+
  | 83|.
  |83 |
  +---+

Multiply 8 by 8, þat wol be 64. Write þe 4 ou{er} 8, þat is to say,
ou{er} þe hede of þe neþ{er} 8; & set 6, þe quych [*leaf 159a] is an
articul, next aft{er}. And þen þou schalt haue such a nounb{r}e as is
her{e},

  +-----------+
  | 6483[{13}]|,
  |  83       |
  +-----------+

And þen worch forth.

  ¶ Si digitus t{amen} ponas ip{su}m sup{er} ip{s}am.

  [Sidenote: What if it be a digit.]

¶ Her{e} is þe thryde case, þe quych is þis: yf hit happe þat of þi
m{u}ltiplicaciouɳ come a digit, þ{o}u schalt write þe digit ou{er} þe
hede of þe neþ{er} figur{e}, by the quych þou m{u}ltipliest þe hier{e}
figur{e}, for þis nedes no Ensampul.

  ¶ Subdita m{u}ltiplica non hanc que [incidit] illi
    Delet ea{m} penit{us} scribens quod p{ro}uenit inde.

  [Sidenote: The fourth case of the craft.]

¶ Her{e} is þe 4 case, þe quych is: yf hit be happe þat þe neþ{er}
figur{e} schal multiplye þat figur{e}, þe quych stondes ou{er} þat
figures hede, þou schal do away þe hier figur{e} & sett þ{er}e þat
þ{a}t comys of þ{a}t m{u}ltiplicacioɳ. As yf þ{er}e come of þat
m{u}ltiplicacioɳ an articuls þou schalt write þere þe hier figur{e}
stode a 0. ¶ And write þe articuls in þe lyft side, yf þat hit be a
digit write þ{er}e a digit. yf þat h{i}t be a composit, write þe digit
of þe composit. And þe articul in þe lyft side. al þis is lyȝt y-nowȝt,
þ{er}e-for{e} þer nedes no Ensampul.

  ¶ S{ed} si m{u}ltiplicat alia{m} ponas sup{er} ip{s}am
    Adiu{n}ges num{er}u{m} que{m} p{re}bet duct{us} ear{um}.

  [Sidenote: The fifth case of the craft.]

¶ Her{e} is þe 5 case, þe quych is þis: yf [*leaf 159b] þe neþ{er}
figur{e} schul m{u}ltiplie þe hier, and þat hier figur{e} is not recte
ou{er} his hede. And þat neþ{er} figur{e} hase oþ{er} figures, or on
figure ou{er} his hede by m{u}ltiplicacioɳ, þat hase be afor{e}, þou
schalt write þat nounbre, þe quych comes of þat, ou{er} all{e} þe ylke
figures hedes, as þus here:

  +-----+
  |  236|
  |234  |
  +-----+

Multiply 2 by 2, þat wol be 4; set 4 ou{er} þe hede of þat 2. þen[{14}]
m{u}ltiplies þe hier 2 by þe neþ{er} 3, þat wol be 6. set ou{er} his
hede 6, multiplie þe hier 2 by þe neþ{er} 4, þat wol be 8. do away þe
hier 2, þe quych stondes ou{er} þe hede of þe figur{e} of 4, and set
þ{er}e 8. And þou schalt haue þis nounb{re} here

  +-------+
  | 46836 |
  | 234   |
  +-------+

And antery þi figur{e}s, þat is to say, set þi neþ{er} 4 vnd{er} þe hier
3, and set þi 2 other figures ner{e} hym, so þat þe neþ{er} 2 stonde
vnd{ur} þe hier 6, þe quych 6 stondes in þe lyft side. And þat 3 þat
stondes vndur 8, as þus aftur ȝe may se,

  +-------+
  | 46836 |
  |  234  |
  +-------+

Now worch forthermor{e}, And m{u}ltiplye þat hier 3 by 2, þat wol be 6,
set þ{a}t 6 þe quych stondes ou{er} þe hede of þat 2, And þen worch as I
taȝt þe afore.

  [*leaf 160a]

  ¶ Si sup{ra}posita cifra debet m{u}ltiplicar{e}
     Prorsus ea{m} deles & ibi scribi cifra debet.

  [Sidenote: The sixth case of the craft.]

¶ Her{e} is þe 6 case, þe quych is þis: yf hit happe þat þe figur{e} by
þe quych þou schal m{u}ltiplye þe hier figur{e}, þe quych stondes ryght
ou{er} hym by a 0, þou schalt do away þat figur{e}, þe quych ou{er} þat
cifre hede. ¶ And write þ{ere} þat nounbre þat comes of þe
m{u}ltiplicacioɳ as þus, 23. do away 2 and sett þ{er}e a 0. vn{de}
v{er}sus.

  ¶ Si cifra m{u}ltiplicat alia{m} posita{m} sup{er} ip{s}am
    Sitq{ue} locus sup{ra} vacu{us} sup{er} hanc cifra{m} fiet.

  [Sidenote: The seventh case of the craft.]

¶ Her{e} is þe 7 case, þe quych is þis: yf a 0 schal m{u}ltiply a
figur{e}, þe quych stondes not recte ou{er} hym, And ou{er} þat 0 stonde
no thyng, þou schalt write ou{er} þat 0 anoþ{er} 0 as þus:

  +----+
  |  24|
  |03  |
  +----+

multiplye 2 be a 0, it wol be nothyng{e}. write þere a 0 ou{er} þe hede
of þe neþ{er} 0, And þen worch forth til þou come to þe ende.

  ¶ Si sup{ra}[{15}] fuerit cifra sem{per} e{st} p{re}t{er}eunda.

  [Sidenote: The eighth case of the craft.]

¶ Her{e} is þe 8 case, þe quych is þis: yf þ{ere} be a 0 or mony cifers
in þe hier rewe, þ{o}u schalt not m{u}ltiplie hem, bot let hem stonde.
And antery þe figures beneþe to þe next figur{e} sygnificatyf as þus:

  +-----+
  |00032|.
  |22   |
  +-----+

Ou{er}-lepe all{e} þese cifers & sett þat [*leaf 160b] neþ{er} 2 þat
stondes toward þe ryght side, and sett hym vnd{ur} þe 3, and sett þe
oþ{er} nether 2 nere hym, so þat he stonde vnd{ur} þe thrydde 0, þe
quych stondes next 3. And þan worch. vnd{e} v{er}sus.

  ¶ Si dubites, an sit b{e}n{e} m{u}ltiplicac{i}o facta,
    Diuide totalem nu{mer}u{m} p{er} multiplicante{m}.

  [Sidenote: How to prove the multiplication.]

¶ Her{e} he teches how þou schalt know wheþ{er} þou hase wel I-do or no.
And he says þat þou schalt deuide all{e} þe nounb{r}e þat comes of þe
m{u}ltiplicacioɳ by þe neþ{er} figures. And þen þou schalt haue þe same
nounbur þat þ{o}u hadyst in þe begynnyng{e}. but ȝet þou hast not þe
craft of dyuisioɳ, but þ{o}u schalt haue hit aft{er}warde.

  ¶ P{er} num{er}u{m} si vis nu{mer}u{m} q{u}oq{ue} m{u}ltiplicar{e}
  ¶ T{antu}m p{er} normas subtiles absq{ue} figuris
    Has normas pot{er}is p{er} v{er}sus scir{e} sequentes.

  [Sidenote: Mental multiplication.]

¶ Her{e} he teches þe to m{u}ltiplie be þowȝt figures in þi mynde. And
þe sentence of þis v{er}se is þis: yf þo{u} wel m{u}ltiplie on nounbre
by anoþ{er} in þi mynde, þ{o}u schal haue þ{er}eto rewles in þe v{er}ses
þat schal come aft{er}.

  ¶ Si tu p{er} digitu{m} digitu{m} vis m{u}ltiplicar{e}
    Re{gula} p{re}cedens dat qualit{er} est op{er}andu{m}.

  [Sidenote: Digit by digit is easy.]

¶ Her{e} he teches a rewle as þou hast afor{e} to m{u}ltiplie a digit be
anoþ{er}, as yf þou wolde wete qwat is sex tymes 6. þou [*leaf 161a]
schalt wete by þe rewle þat I taȝt þe befor{e}, yf þou haue mynde
þ{er}of.

  ¶ Articulu{m} si p{er} reliquu{m} reliquu{m} vis m{u}lti{plica}r{e}
    In p{ro}p{r}iu{m} digitu{m} debet vt{er}q{ue} resolui.
  ¶ Articul{us} digitos post se m{u}ltiplicantes
    Ex digit{us} quociens retenerit m{u}ltipli{ca}r{i}
    Articuli faciu{n}t tot centu{m} m{u}ltiplicati.

  [Sidenote: The first case of the craft. Article by article; an
  example: another example:]

    [Headnote: How to work subtly without Figures.]

  [Sidenote: Mental multiplication. Another example. Another example.
  Notation. Notation again. Mental multiplication.]

¶ Her{e} he teches þe furst rewle, þe quych is þis: yf þou wel
m{u}ltiplie an articul be anoþ{er}, so þat both þe articuls bene
w{i}t{h}-Inne an hundreth, þus þ{o}u schalt do. take þe digit of bothe
the articuls, for eu{er}y articul hase a digit, þen m{u}ltiplye þat on
digit by þat oþ{er}, and loke how mony vnytes ben in þe nounbre þat
comes of þe m{u}ltiplicacioɳ of þe 2 digittes, & so mony hundrythes ben
in þe nounb{re} þat schal come of þe m{u}ltiplicacioɳ of þe ylke 2
articuls as þus. yf þ{o}u wold wete qwat is ten tymes ten. take þe digit
of ten, þe quych is 1; take þe digit of þat oþ{er} ten, þe quych is on.
¶ Also m{u}ltiplie 1 be 1, as on tyme on þat is but 1. In on is but on
vnite as þou wost welle, þ{er}efor{e} ten tymes ten is but a hundryth.
¶ Also yf þou wold wete what is twenty tymes 30. take þe digit of
twenty, þat is 2; & take þe digitt of thrytty, þat is 3. m{u}ltiplie 3
be 2, þat is 6. Now in 6 ben 6 vnites, ¶ And so mony hundrythes ben in
20 tymes 30[*leaf 161b], þ{ere}for{e} 20 tymes 30 is 6 hundryth eueɳ.
loke & se. ¶ But yf it be so þat on{e} articul be w{i}t{h}-Inne an
hundryth, or by-twene an hundryth and a thowsande, so þat it be not a
þowsande fully. þen loke how mony vnytes ben in þe nounbur þat comys of
þe m{u}ltiplicacioɳ [{16}]And so mony tymes[{16}] of 2 digitt{es} of
ylke articuls, so mony thowsant ben in þe nounbre, the qwych comes of þe
m{u}ltiplicacioɳ. And so mony tymes ten thowsand schal be in þe nounbre
þat comes of þe m{u}ltiplicacion of 2 articuls, as yf þ{o}u wold wete
qwat is 4 hundryth tymes [two hundryth]. Multiply 4 be 2,[{17}] þat wol
be 8. in 8 ben 8 vnites. ¶ And so mony tymes ten thousand be in 4
hundryth tymes [2][{17}] hundryth, þ{a}t is 80 thousand. Take hede,
I schall telle þe a gen{e}rall{e} rewle whan þ{o}u hast 2 articuls, And
þou wold wete qwat comes of þe m{u}ltiplicacioɳ of hem 2. m{u}ltiplie þe
digit of þ{a}t on articuls, and kepe þat nounbre, þen loke how mony
cifers schuld go befor{e} þat on articuls, and he wer{e} write. Als mony
cifers schuld go befor{e} þat other, & he wer{e} write of cifers. And
haue all{e} þe ylke cifers toged{ur} in þi mynde, [*leaf 162a] a-rowe
ychoɳ aftur other, and in þe last plase set þe nounbre þat comes of þe
m{u}ltiplicacioɳ of þe 2 digittes. And loke in þi mynde in what place he
stondes, wher{e} in þe secunde, or in þe thryd, or in þe 4, or wher{e}
ellis, and loke qwat þe figures by-token in þat place; & so mych is þe
nounbre þat comes of þe 2 articuls y-m{u}ltiplied to-ged{ur} as þus:
yf þ{o}u wold wete what is 20 thousant tymes 3 þowsande. m{u}ltiply þe
digit of þat articull{e} þe quych is 2 by þe digitte of þat oþ{er}
articul þe quych is 3, þat wol be 6. þen loke how mony cifers schal go
to 20 thousant as hit schuld be write in a tabul. c{er}tainly 4 cifers
schuld go to 20 þowsant. ffor þis figure 2 in þe fyrst place betokenes
twene. ¶ In þe secunde place hit betokenes twenty. ¶ In þe 3. place hit
betokenes 2 hundryth. .¶. In þe 4 place 2 thousant. ¶ In þe 5 place
h{i}t betokenes twenty þousant. þ{ere}for{e} he most haue 4 cifers
a-for{e} hym þat he may sto{n}de in þe 5 place. kepe þese 4 cifers in
thy mynde, þen loke how mony cifers goɳ to 3 thousant. Certayn to 3
thousante [*leaf 162b] goɳ 3 cifers afor{e}. Now cast ylke 4 cifers þat
schuld go to twenty thousant, And thes 3 cifers þat schuld go afor{e} 3
thousant, & sette hem in rewe ychoɳ aft{er} oþ{er} in þi mynde, as þai
schuld stonde in a tabull{e}. And þen schal þou haue 7 cifers; þen sett
þat 6 þe quych comes of þe m{u}ltiplicacioɳ of þe 2 digitt{es} aft{u}r
þe ylke cifers in þe 8 place as yf þat hit stode in a tabul. And loke
qwat a figur{e} of 6 schuld betoken in þe 8 place. yf hit wer{e} in a
tabul & so mych it is. & yf þat figure of 6 stonde in þe fyrst place he
schuld betoken but 6. ¶ In þe 2 place he schuld betoken sexty. ¶ In the
3 place he schuld betokeɳ sex hundryth. ¶ In þe 4 place sex thousant.
¶ In þe 5 place sexty þowsant. ¶ In þe sext place sex hundryth þowsant.
¶ In þe 7 place sex þowsant thousant{es}. ¶ In þe 8 place sexty þowsant
thousantes. þ{er}for{e} sett 6 in octauo loco, And he schal betoken
sexty þowsant thousantes. And so mych is twenty þowsant tymes 3
thousant, ¶ And þis rewle is gen{er}all{e} for all{e} man{er} of
articuls, Whethir þai be hundryth or þowsant; but þ{o}u most know well
þe craft of þe wryrchyng{e} in þe tabull{e} [*leaf 163a] or þou know to
do þus in þi mynde aftur þis rewle. Thou most þat þis rewle holdyþe note
but wher{e} þ{ere} ben 2 articuls and no mo of þe quych ayther of hem
hase but on figur{e} significatyf. As twenty tymes 3 thousant or 3
hundryth, and such oþ{ur}.

  ¶ Articulum digito si m{u}ltiplicare o{portet}
    Articuli digit[i sumi quo multiplicate]
    Debem{us} reliquu{m} quod m{u}ltiplicat{ur} ab ill{is}
    P{er} reliq{u}o decuplu{m} sic su{m}ma{m} later{e} neq{ui}b{i}t.

  [Sidenote: The third case of the craft; an example.]

¶ Her{e} he puttes þe thryde rewle, þe quych is þis. yf þ{o}u wel
m{u}ltiply in þi mynde, And þe Articul be a digitte, þou schalt loke þat
þe digitt be w{i}t{h}-Inne an hundryth, þen þou schalt m{u}ltiply the
digitt of þe Articulle by þe oþer digitte. And eu{er}y vnite in þe
nounbre þat schall{e} come þ{ere}-of schal betoken ten. As þus: yf þat
þ{o}u wold wete qwat is twyes 40. m{u}ltiplie þe digitt{e} of 40, þe
quych is 4, by þe oþ{er} diget, þe quych is 2. And þat wolle be 8. And
in þe nombre of 8 ben 8 vnites, & eu{er}y of þe ylke vnites schuld
stonde for 10. þ{ere}-fore þ{ere} schal be 8 tymes 10, þat wol be 4
score. And so mony is twyes 40. ¶ If þe articul be a hundryth or be 2
hundryth And a þowsant, so þat hit be notte a thousant, [*leaf 163b]
worch as þo{u} dyddyst afor{e}, saue þ{o}u schalt rekene eu{er}y vnite
for a hundryth.

  ¶ In nu{mer}u{m} mixtu{m} digitu{m} si ducer{e} cures
    Articul{us} mixti sumat{ur} deinde resoluas
    In digitu{m} post fac respectu de digitis
    Articul{us}q{ue} docet excrescens in diriua{n}do
    In digitu{m} mixti post ducas m{u}ltiplica{n}te{m}
  ¶ De digitis vt norma [{18}][docet] de [hunc]
    Multiplica si{mu}l et sic postea summa patebit.

  [Sidenote: The fourth case of the craft: Composite by digit. Mental
  multiplication.]

Here he puttes þe 4 rewle, þe quych is þis: yf þou m{u}ltipliy on
composit be a digit as 6 tymes 24, [{19}]þen take þe diget of þat
composit, & m{u}ltiply þ{a}t digitt by þat oþ{er} diget, and kepe þe
nomb{ur} þat comes þ{ere}-of. þen take þe digit of þat composit,
& m{u}ltiply þat digit by anoþ{er} diget, by þe quych þ{o}u hast
m{u}ltiplyed þe diget of þe articul, and loke qwat comes þ{ere}-of. þen
take þ{o}u þat nounbur, & cast hit to þat other nounbur þat þ{o}u
secheste as þus yf þou wel wete qwat comes of 6 tymes 4 & twenty.
multiply þat articull{e} of þe composit by þe digit, þe quych is 6,
as yn þe thryd rewle þ{o}u was tauȝt, And þat schal be 6 scor{e}. þen
m{u}ltiply þe diget of þe {com}posit, [*leaf 164a] þe quych is 4, and
m{u}ltiply þat by þat other diget, þe quych is 6, as þou wast tauȝt in
þe first rewle, yf þ{o}u haue mynde þ{er}of, & þat wol be 4 & twenty.
cast all ylke nounburs to-ged{ir}, & hit schal be 144. And so mych is 6
tymes 4 & twenty.

    [Headnote: How to multiply without Figures.]

  ¶ Duct{us} in articulu{m} num{erus} si {com}posit{us} sit
    Articulu{m} puru{m} comites articulu{m} q{u}o{que}
    Mixti pro digit{is} post fiat [et articulus vt]
    Norma iubet [retinendo quod extra dicta ab illis]
    Articuli digitu{m} post tu mixtu{m} digitu{m} duc
    Re{gula} de digitis nec p{re}cipit articul{us}q{ue}
    Ex quib{us} exc{re}scens su{m}me tu iunge p{ri}ori
    Sic ma{n}ifesta cito fiet t{ibi} su{m}ma petita.

  [Sidenote: The fifth case of the craft: Article by Composite.
  An example.]

¶ Her{e} he puttes þe 5 rewle, þe quych is þis: yf þ{o}u wel m{u}ltiply
an Articul be a composit, m{u}ltiplie þat Articul by þe articul of þe
composit, and worch as þou wos tauȝt in þe secunde rewle, of þe quych
rewle þe v{er}se begynnes þus. ¶ Articulu{m} si p{er} Relicu{m} vis
m{u}ltiplicare. þen m{u}ltiply þe diget of þe composit by þat oþ{ir}
articul aft{ir} þe doctrine of þe 3 rewle. take þ{er}of gode hede,
I p{ra}y þe as þus. Yf þ{o}u wel wete what is 24 tymes ten. Multiplie
ten by 20, þat wel be 2 hundryth. þen m{u}ltiply þe diget of þe 10, þe
quych is 1, by þe diget of þe composit, þe quych is 4, & þ{a}t [*leaf
164b] wol be 4. þen reken eu{er}y vnite þat is in 4 for 10, & þat schal
be 40. Cast 40 to 2 hundryth, & þat wol be 2 hundryth & 40. And so mych
is 24 tymes ten.

    [Headnote: How to work without Figures.]

  ¶ Compositu{m} num{er}u{m} mixto si[c] m{u}ltiplicabis
    Vndecies tredeci{m} sic e{st} ex hiis op{er}andum
    In reliquu{m} p{rimu}m demu{m} duc post in eund{em}
    Vnu{m} post den{u}m duc in t{ri}a dei{n}de p{er} vnu{m}
    Multiplices{que} dem{u}m int{ra} o{mn}ia m{u}ltiplicata
    In su{m}ma decies q{ua}m si fu{er}it t{ibi} doces
    Multiplicandor{um} de normis sufficiunt h{ec}.

  [Sidenote: The sixth case of the craft: Composite by Composite.
  Mental multiplication. An example of the sixth case of the craft.]

¶ Here he puttes þe 6 rewle, & þe last of all{e} multiplicacioɳ,
þe quych is þis: yf þ{o}u wel m{u}ltiplye a {com}posit by a-noþ{er}
composit, þou schalt do þus. m{u}ltiplie þ{a}t on composit, qwych þ{o}u
welt of the twene, by þe articul of þe toþ{er} composit, as þ{o}u wer{e}
tauȝt in þe 5 rewle, þen m{u}ltiplie þ{a}t same composit, þe quych þou
hast m{u}ltiplied by þe oþ{er} articul, by þe digit of þe oþ{er}
composit, as þ{o}u was tauȝt in þe 4 rewle. As þus, yf þou wold wete
what is 11 tymes 13, as þ{o}u was tauȝt in þe 5 rewle, & þat schal be an
hundryth & ten, aft{er}warde m{u}ltiply þat same co{m}posit þ{a}t þ{o}u
hast m{u}ltiplied, þe quych is a .11. And m{u}ltiplye hit be þe digit of
þe oþ{er} composit, þe quych is 3, for 3 is þe digit of 13, And þat wel
be 30. þen take þe digit of þat composit, þe quych composit þou
m{u}ltiplied by þe digit of þ{a}t oþ{er} {com}posit, [*leaf 165a] þe
quych is a 11. ¶ Also of the quych 11 on is þe digit. m{u}ltiplie þat
digitt by þe digett of þat oth{er} composit, þe quych diget is 3,
as þ{o}u was tauȝt in þe first rewle i{n} þe begynnyng{e} of þis craft.
þe quych rewle begynn{es} “In digitu{m} cures.” And of all{e} þe
m{u}ltiplicacioɳ of þe 2 digitt comys thre, for onys 3 is but 3. Now
cast all{e} þese nounbers toged{ur}, the quych is þis, a hundryth & ten
& 30 & 3. And al þat wel be 143. Write 3 first in þe ryght side. And
cast 10 to 30, þat wol be 40. set 40 next aft{ur} towarde þe lyft side,
And set aftur a hundryth as her{e} an Ensampull{e}, 143.

(Cetera desunt.)


FOOTNOTES (The Crafte of Nombrynge):

  [1: In MS, ‘awiy.’]
  [2: ‘ben’ repeated in MS.]
  [3: In MS. ‘thausandes.’]
  [4: Perhaps “So.”]
  [5: ‘hali’ marked for erasure in MS.]
  [6: ‘moy’ in MS.]
  [7: ‘Subt{ra}has a{u}t addis a dext{ri}s {ve}l medi{a}b{is}’ added
    on margin of MS.]
  [8: After ‘craft’ insert ‘the .4. what is þe p{ro}fet of þis craft.’]
  [9: After ‘sythes’ insert ‘& þis wordes fyue sithe & sex sythes.’]
  [10: ‘t’l’ marked for erasure before ‘tyl’ in MS.]
  [11: Here ‘of þe same rew’ is marked for erasure in MS.]
  [12: ‘s{ed}’ deleted in MS.]
  [13: 6883 in MS.]
  [14: ‘þen’ overwritten on ‘þat’ marked for erasure.]
  [15: ‘Supra’ inserted in MS. in place of ‘cifra’ marked for erasure.]
  [16--16: Marked for erasure in MS.]
  [17: 4 in MS.]
  [18: docet. decet MS.]
  [19: ‘4 times 4’ in MS.]




+The Art of Nombryng.+

A TRANSLATION OF

+John of Holywood’s De Arte Numerandi.+


[_Ashmole MS. 396, fol. 48._]

  +Boys seying in the begynnyng of his Arsemetrik{e}:--All{e}
    [*Fol. 48.] thynges that ben{e} fro the first begynnyng of thynges
    have p{ro}ceded{e}, and come forth{e}, And by reso{u}n of nombre
    ben formed{e}; And in wise as they ben{e}, So oweth{e} they to be
    knowen{e}; wherfor in vniu{er}sall{e} knowlechyng of thynges the
    Art of nombrynge is best, and most operatyf{e}.+

  [Sidenote: The name of the art. Derivation of Algorism. Another.
  Another. Kinds of numbers. The 9 rules of the Art.]

Therfore sithen the science of the whiche at this tyme we intenden{e} to
write of standith{e} all{e} and about nombre: ffirst we most se, what is
the p{ro}pre name therof{e}, and fro whens the name come: Afterward{e}
what is nombre, And how manye spices of nombre ther ben. The name is
cleped{e} Algorisme, had{e} out of Algor{e}, other of Algos, in grewe,
That is clepid{e} in englissh{e} art other craft, And of Rithm{us} that
is called{e} nombre. So algorisme is cleped{e} the art of nombryng,
other it is had of{e} en or in, and gogos that is introduccio{u}n, and
Rithm{us} nombre, that is to say Interduccio{u}n of nombre. And thirdly
it is had{e} of the name of a kyng that is cleped{e} Algo and Rythm{us};
So called{e} Algorism{us}. Sothely .2. maner{e} of nombres ben
notified{e}; Formall{e},[{1}] as nombr{e} i{s} vnitees gadred{e}
to-gedres; Materiall{e},[{2}] as nombr{e} is a colleccio{u}n of vnitees.
Other nombr{e} is a multitude had{e} out of vnitees, vnitee is that
thynge wher-by eu{er}y thynge is called{e} oone, other o thynge. Of
nombres, that one is cleped{e} digitall{e}, that other{e} Article,
Another a nombre componed{e} oþ{er} myxt. Another digitall{e} is a
nombre w{i}t{h}-in .10.; Article is þ{a}t nombre that may be dyvyded{e}
in .10. p{ar}ties egally, And that there leve no residue; Componed{e} or
medled{e} is that nombre that is come of a digite and of an article. And
vndrestand{e} wele that all{e} nombres betwix .2. articles next is a
nombr{e} componed{e}. Of this art ben{e} .9. spices, that is forto sey,
num{er}acio{u}n, addicio{u}n, Subtraccio{u}n, Mediac{i}o{u}n,
Duplacio{u}n, Multipliacio{u}n, Dyvysio{u}n, Progressio{u}n, And of
Rootes the extraccio{u}n, and that may be had{e} in .2. maners, that is
to sey in nombres quadrat, and in cubic{es}: Amonge the which{e}, ffirst
of Num{er}acio{u}n, and aft{er}ward{e} of þe oþ{er}s by ordure,
y entende to write.


    [Headnote: Chapter I. Numeration.]

  [*Fol. 48b]

  +For-soth{e} num{er}acio{u}n is of eu{er}y numbre by
  competent figures an artificiall{e} rep{re}sentacio{u}n.+

  [Sidenote: Figures, differences, places, and limits. The 9 figures.
  The cipher. The numeration of digits, of articles, of composites.
  The value due to position. Numbers are written from right to left.]

Sothly figure, difference, places, and lynes supposen o thyng other the
same, But they ben sette here for dyue{r}s resons. ffigure is cleped{e}
for p{ro}traccio{u}n of figuracio{u}n; Difference is called{e} for
therby is shewed{e} eu{er}y figure, how it hath{e} difference fro the
figures before them: place by cause of space, where-in me writeth{e}:
lynees, for that is ordeyned{e} for the p{re}sentacio{u}n of eu{er}y
figure. And vnderstonde that ther ben .9. lymytes of figures that
rep{re}senten the .9. digit{es} that ben these. 0. 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3.
2. 1. The .10. is cleped{e} theta, or a cercle, other a cifre, other a
figure of nought for nought it signyfieth{e}. Nathelesse she holdyng
that place giveth{e} others for to signyfie; for with{e}-out cifre or
cifres a pure article may not be writte. And sithen that by these .9.
figures significatif{es} Ioyned{e} w{i}t{h} cifre or w{i}t{h} cifres
all{e} nombres ben and may be rep{re}sented{e}, It was, nether is,
no nede to fynde any more figures. And note wele that eu{er}y digite
shall{e} be writte w{i}t{h} oo figure allone to it ap{ro}pred{e}. And
all{e} articles by a cifre, ffor eu{er}y article is named{e} for oone of
the digitis as .10. of 1.. 20. of. 2. and so of the others, &c. And
all{e} nombres digitall{e} owen to be sette in the first difference:
All{e} articles in the seconde. Also all{e} nombres fro .10. til an
.100. [which] is excluded{e}, with .2. figures mvst be writte; And yf it
be an article, by a cifre first put, and the figure y-writte toward{e}
the lift hond{e}, that signifieth{e} the digit of the which{e} the
article is named{e}; And yf it be a nombre componed{e}, ffirst write the
digit that is a part of that componed{e}, and write to the lift side the
article as it is seid{e} be-fore. All{e} nombre that is fro an
hundred{e} tille a thousand{e} exclused{e}, owith{e} to be writ by .3.
figures; and all{e} nombre that is fro a thousand{e} til .x. Mł. mvst be
writ by .4. figures; And so forthe. And vnderstond{e} wele that eu{er}y
figure sette in the first place signyfieth{e} his digit; In the
second{e} place .10. tymes his digit; In the .3. place an hundred{e} so
moche; In the .4. place a thousand{e} so moche; In the .5. place .x.
thousand{e} so moch{e}; In the .6. place an hundred{e} thousand{e} so
moch{e}; In the .7. place a thousand{e} thousand{e}. And so infynytly
mvltiplying by [*Fol. 49.] these .3. 10, 100, 1000. And vnderstand{e}
wele that competently me may sette vpon figure in the place of a
thousand{e}, a prik{e} to shewe how many thousand{e} the last figure
shall{e} rep{re}sent. We writen{e} in this art to the lift side-ward{e},
as arabien{e} writen{e}, that weren fynders of this science, other{e}
for this reso{u}n, that for to kepe a custumable ordr{e} in redyng,
Sette we all{e}-wey the more nombre before.

    [Headnote: Chapter II. Addition.]

  [Sidenote: Definition. How the numbers should be written. The method
  of working. Begin at the right. The Sum is a digit, or an article,
  or a composite.]

Addicio{u}n is of nombre other of nombres vnto nombre or to nombres
aggregacio{u}n, that me may see that that is come therof as
exc{re}ssent. In addicio{u}n, 2. ordres of figures and .2. nombres ben
necessary, that is to sey, a nombre to be added{e} and the nombre wherto
the addic{i}oun shold{e} be made to. The nombre to be added{e} is that
þat shold{e} be added{e} therto, and shall{e} be vnderwriten; the nombre
vnto the which{e} addicio{u}n shall{e} be made to is that nombre that
resceyueth{e} the addicion of þat other, and shall{e} be writen above;
and it is convenient that the lesse nombre be vnderwrit, and the more
added{e}, than the contrary. But whether it happ{e} one other other, the
same comyth{e} of, Therfor, yf þow wilt adde nombre to nombre, write the
nombre wherto the addicio{u}n shall{e} be made in the omest ordre by his
differences, so that the first of the lower ordre be vndre the first of
the omyst ordre, and so of others. That done, adde the first of the
lower ordre to the first of the omyst ordre. And of such{e} addicio{u}n,
other þ{er}e grow{i}t{h} therof a digit, An article, other a
composed{e}. If it be digit{us}, In the place of the omyst shalt thow
write the digit excrescyng, as thus:--

  +----------------------------+---+
  |The resultant               | 2 |
  +----------------------------+---+
  |To whom it shal be added{e} | 1 |
  +----------------------------+---+
  |The nombre to be added{e}   | 1 |
  +----------------------------+---+

If the article; in the place of the omyst put a-way by a cifre writte,
and the digit transferred{e}, of þe which{e} the article toke his name,
toward{e} the lift side, and be it added{e} to the next figure folowyng,
yf ther be any figure folowyng; or no, and yf it be not, leve it [in
the] void{e}, as thus:--

  +---------------------------------+----+
  | The resultant                   | 10 |
  +---------------------------------+----+
  | To whom it shall{e} be added{e} |  7 |
  +---------------------------------+----+
  | The nombre to be added{e}       |  3 |
  +---------------------------------+----+

  +----------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
  | Resultans            | 2 | 7 | 8 | 2 | 7 |
  +----------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
  | Cui d{ebet} addi     | 1 | 0 | 0 | 8 | 4 |
  +----------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
  | Num{erus} addend{us} | 1 | 7 | 7 | 4 | 3 |
  +----------------------+---+---+---+---+---+

And yf it happe that the figure folowyng wherto the addicio{u}n shall{e}
be made by [the cifre of] an article, it sette a-side; In his place
write the [*Fol. 49b] [digit of the] Article as thus:--

  +---------------------------------+----+
  | The resultant                   | 17 |
  +---------------------------------+----+
  | To whom it shall{e} be added{e} | 10 |
  +---------------------------------+----+
  | The nombre to be added{e}       |  7 |
  +---------------------------------+----+

And yf it happe that a figure of .9. by the figure that me mvst adde
[one] to, In the place of that 9. put a cifre {and} write þe article
toward{e} þe lift hond{e} as bifore, and thus:--

  +---------------------------------+----+
  | The resultant                   | 10 |
  +---------------------------------+----+
  | To whom it shall{e} be added{e} |  9 |
  +---------------------------------+----+
  | The nombre to be added{e}       |  1 |
  +---------------------------------+----+

And yf[{3}] [therefrom grow a] nombre componed,[{4}] [in the place of
the nombre] put a-way[{5}][let] the digit [be][{6}]writ þ{a}t is part of
þ{a}t co{m}posid{e}, and þan put to þe lift side the article as before,
and þus:--

  +---------------------------------+----+
  | The resultant                   | 12 |
  +---------------------------------+----+
  | To whom it shall{e} be added{e} |  8 |
  +---------------------------------+----+
  | The nombre to be added{e}       |  4 |
  +---------------------------------+----+

This done, adde the seconde to the second{e}, and write above oþ{er} as
before.

  [Sidenote: The translator’s note.]

Note wele þ{a}t in addic{i}ons and in all{e} spices folowyng, whan he
seith{e} one the other shall{e} be writen aboue, and me most vse eu{er}
figure, as that eu{er}y figure were sette by half{e}, and by
hym-self{e}.


    [Headnote: Chapter III. Subtraction.]

  [Sidenote: Definition of Subtraction. How it may be done. What is
  required. Write the greater number above. Subtract the first figure
  if possible. If it is not possible ‘borrow ten,’ and then subtract.]

Subtraccio{u}n is of .2. p{ro}posed{e} nombres, the fyndyng of the
excesse of the more to the lasse: Other subtraccio{u}n is ablacio{u}n of
o nombre fro a-nother, that me may see a some left. The lasse of the
more, or even of even, may be w{i}t{h}draw; The more fro the lesse may
neu{er} be. And sothly that nombre is more that hath{e} more figures, So
that the last be signyficatife{s}: And yf ther ben as many in that one
as in that other, me most deme it by the last, other by the next last.
More-ou{er} in w{i}t{h}-drawyng .2. nombres ben necessary; A nombre to
be w{i}t{h}draw, And a nombre that me shall{e} w{i}t{h}-draw of. The
nombre to be w{i}t{h}-draw shall{e} be writ in the lower ordre by his
differences; The nombre fro the which{e} me shall{e} with{e}-draw in the
omyst ordre, so that the first be vnder the first, the second{e} vnder
the second{e}, And so of all{e} others. With{e}-draw therfor the first
of the lower{e} ordre fro the first of the ordre above his hede, and
that wolle be other more or lesse, oþ{er} egall{e}.

  +---------------------------------+----+
  | The remanent                    | 20 |
  +---------------------------------+----+
  | Wherof me shall{e} w{i}t{h}draw | 22 |
  +---------------------------------+----+
  | The nombre to be w{i}t{h}draw   |  2 |
  +---------------------------------+----+

yf it be egall{e} or even the figure sette beside, put in his place a
cifre. And yf it be more put away þ{er}fro als many of vnitees the lower
figure conteyneth{e}, and writ the residue as thus

  +----------------------------------+---+---+
  | The remanent                     | 2 | 2 |
  +----------------------------------+---+---+
  | Wherof me shall{e} w{i}t{h}-draw | 2 | 8 |
  +----------------------------------+---+---+
  | Þe nombre to be w{i}t{h}draw     |   | 6 |
  +----------------------------------+---+---+

  [*Fol. 50.]

  +--------------------------+---+---+-----+---+---+---+---+---+---+
  | Remane{n}s               | 2 | 2 |  1  | 8 | 2 | 9 | 9 | 9 | 8 |
  +--------------------------+---+---+-----+---+---+---+---+---+---+
  | A quo sit subtraccio     | 8 | 7 |  2  | 4 | 3 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 4 |
  +--------------------------+---+---+-----+---+---+---+---+---+---+
  | Numerus subt{ra}hend{us} | 6 | 5 |[{7}]|[6]| . | . | . | . | 6 |
  +--------------------------+---+---+-----+---+---+---+---+---+---+

And yf it be lesse, by-cause the more may not be w{i}t{h}-draw ther-fro,
borow an vnyte of the next figure that is worth{e} 10. Of that .10. and
of the figure that ye wold{e} have w{i}t{h}-draw fro be-fore to-gedre
Ioyned{e}, w{i}t{h}-draw þe figure be-nethe, and put the residue in the
place of the figure put a-side as þ{us}:--

  +----------------------------------+---+---+
  | The remanent                     | 1 | 8 |
  +----------------------------------+---+---+
  | Wherof me shall{e} w{i}t{h}-draw | 2 | 4 |
  +----------------------------------+---+---+
  | The nombre to be w{i}t{h}-draw   | 0 | 6 |
  +----------------------------------+---+---+

  [Sidenote: If the second figure is one.]

And yf the figure wherof me shal borow the vnyte be one, put it a-side,
and write a cifre in the place þ{er}of, lest the figures folowing faile
of thair{e} nombre, and þan worch{e} as it shew{i}t{h} in this figure
here:--

  +--------------------------------+---+---+------+
  | The remanent                   | 3 | 0 |9[{8}]|
  +--------------------------------+---+---+------+
  | Wherof me shal w{i}t{h}-draw   | 3 | 1 |   2  |
  +--------------------------------+---+---+------+
  | The nombre to be w{i}t{h}-draw | . | . |   3  |
  +--------------------------------+---+---+------+

  [Sidenote: If the second figure is a cipher.]

And yf the vnyte wherof me shal borow be a cifre, go ferther to the
figure signyficatif{e}, and ther borow one, and reto{ur}nyng bak{e}, in
the place of eu{er}y cifre þ{a}t ye passid{e} ou{er}, sette figures of
.9. as here it is specified{e}:--

  +----------------------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
  | The remenaunt                    | 2 | 9 | 9 | 9 | 9 |
  +----------------------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
  | Wherof me shall{e} w{i}t{h}-draw | 3 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 3 |
  +----------------------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
  | The nombre to be w{i}t{h}-draw   |   |   |   |   | 4 |
  +----------------------------------+---+---+---+---+---+

  [Sidenote: A justification of the rule given. Why it is better to
  work from right to left. How to prove subtraction, and addition.]

And whan me cometh{e} to the nombre wherof me intendith{e}, there
remayneth{e} all{e}-wayes .10. ffor þe which{e} .10. &c. The reson why
þat for eu{er}y cifre left behynde me setteth figures ther of .9. this
it is:--If fro the .3. place me borowed{e} an vnyte, that vnyte by
respect of the figure that he came fro rep{re}sentith an .C., In the
place of that cifre [passed over] is left .9., [which is worth ninety],
and yit it remayneth{e} as .10., And the same reson{e} wold{e} be yf me
had{e} borowed{e} an vnyte fro the .4., .5., .6., place, or ony other so
vpward{e}. This done, withdraw the second{e} of the lower ordre fro the
figure above his hede of þe omyst ordre, and wirch{e} as before. And
note wele that in addicion or in subtracc{i}o{u}n me may wele fro the
lift side begynne and ryn to the right side, But it wol be more
p{ro}fitabler to be do, as it is taught. And yf thow wilt p{ro}ve yf
thow have do wele or no, The figures that thow hast withdraw, adde them
ayene to the omyst figures, and they wolle accorde w{i}t{h} the first
that thow haddest yf thow have labored wele; and in like wise in
addicio{u}n, whan thow hast added{e} all{e} thy figures, w{i}t{h}draw
them that thow first [*Fol. 50b] addest, and the same wolle reto{ur}ne.
The subtraccio{u}n is none other but a p{ro}uff{e} of the addicio{u}n,
and the contrarye in like wise.

    [Headnote: Chapter IV. Mediation.]

  [Sidenote: Definition of mediation. Where to begin. If the first
  figure is unity. What to do if it is not unity.]

Mediacio{u}n is the fyndyng of the halfyng of eu{er}y nombre, that it
may be seyn{e} what and how moch{e} is eu{er}y half{e}. In halfyng ay oo
order of figures and oo nombre is necessary, that is to sey the nombre
to be halfed{e}. Therfor yf thow wilt half any nombre, write that nombre
by his differences, and begynne at the right, that is to sey, fro the
first figure to the right side, so that it be signyficatif{e} other
rep{re}sent vnyte or eny other digitall{e} nombre. If it be vnyte write
in his place a cifre for the figures folowyng, [lest they signify less],
and write that vnyte w{i}t{h}out in the table, other resolue it in .60.
mynvt{es} and sette a-side half of tho m{inutes} so, and reserve the
remen{au}nt w{i}t{h}out in the table, as thus .30.; other sette
w{i}t{h}out thus .{dī}: that kepeth{e} none ordre of place, Nathelesse
it hath{e} signyficacio{u}n. And yf the other figure signyfie any other
digital nombre fro vnyte forth{e}, oþ{er} the nombre is od{e} or
even{e}. If it be even, write this half in this wise:--

  +-----------------+---+---+
  | Halfed{e}       | 2 | 2 |
  +-----------------+----+--+
  | to be halfed{e} | 4 | 4 |
  +-----------------+---+---+

And if it be odde, Take the next even vndre hym conteyned{e}, and put
his half in the place of that odde, and of þe vnyte that remayneth{e} to
be halfed{e} do thus:--

  +-----------------+---+---+
  | halfed{e}       | 2 | 3 | [di]
  +-----------------+---+---+
  | To be halfed{e} | 4 | 7 |
  +-----------------+---+---+

  [Sidenote: Then halve the second figure. If it is odd, add 5 to the
  figure before.]

This done, the second{e} is to be halfed{e}, yf it be a cifre put it
be-side, and yf it be significatif{e}, other it is even or od{e}: If it
be even, write in the place of þe nombres wiped{e} out the half{e}; yf
it be od{e}, take the next even vnder it co{n}tenyth{e}, and in the
place of the Impar sette a-side put half of the even: The vnyte that
remayneth{e} to be halfed{e}, respect had{e} to them before, is worth{e}
.10. Dyvide that .10. in .2., 5. is, and sette a-side that one, and adde
that other to the next figure p{re}cedent as here:--

  +-----------------+---+---+---+
  | Halfed{e}       |   |   |   |
  +-----------------+---+---+---+
  | to be halfed{e} |   |   |   |
  +-----------------+---+---+---+

And yf þe addicio{u}n shold{e} be made to a cifre, sette it a-side, and
write in his place .5. And vnder this fo{ur}me me shall{e} write and
worch{e}, till{e} the totall{e} nombre be halfed{e}.

  +------------------+---+---+---+---+---+----+----+---+
  | doubled{e}       | 2 | 6 | 8 | 9 | 0 | 10 | 17 | 4 |
  +------------------+---+---+---+---+---+----+----+---+
  | to be doubled{e} | 1 | 3 | 4 | 4 | 5 |  5 |  8 | 7 |
  +------------------+---+---+---+---+---+----+----+---+

    [Headnote: Chapter V. Duplation.]

  [Sidenote: Definition of Duplation. Where to begin. Why. What to do
  with the result.]

Duplicacio{u}n is ag{re}gacion of nombre [to itself] þat me may se the
nombre growen. In doublyng{e} ay is but one ordre of figures necessarie.
And me most be-gynne w{i}t{h} the lift side, other of the more figure,
And after the nombre of the more figure rep{re}sentith{e}. [*Fol. 51.]
In the other .3. before we begynne all{e} way fro the right side and fro
the lasse nombre, In this spice and in all{e} other folowyng we wolle
begynne fro the lift side, ffor and me bigon th{e} double fro the first,
omwhile me myght double oo thynge twyes. And how be it that me myght
double fro the right, that wold{e} be harder in techyng and in workyng.
Therfor yf thow wolt double any nombre, write that nombre by his
differences, and double the last. And of that doubly{n}g other
growith{e} a nombre digital, article, or componed{e}. [If it be a digit,
write it in the place of the first digit.] If it be article, write in
his place a cifre and transferre the article toward{e} the lift, as
thus:--

  +------------------+----+
  | double           | 10 |
  +------------------+----+
  | to be doubled{e} |  5 |
  +------------------+----+

And yf the nombre be componed{e}, write a digital that is part of his
composicio{u}n, and sette the article to the lift hand{e}, as thus:--

  +------------------+----+
  | doubled{e}       | 16 |
  +------------------+----+
  | to be doubled{e} |  8 |
  +------------------+----+

That done, me most double the last save one, and what groweth{e} þ{er}of
me most worche as before. And yf a cifre be, touch{e} it not. But yf any
nombre shall{e} be added{e} to the cifre, in þe place of þe figure
wiped{e} out me most write the nombre to be added{e}, as thus:--

  +------------------+---+---+---+
  | doubled{e}       | 6 | 0 | 6 |
  +------------------+---+---+---+
  | to be doubled{e} | 3 | 0 | 3 |
  +------------------+---+---+---+

  [Sidenote: How to prove your answer.]

In the same wise me shall{e} wirch{e} of all{e} others. And this
p{ro}bacio{u}n: If thow truly double the halfis, and truly half the
doubles, the same nombre and figure shall{e} mete, such{e} as thow
labo{ur}ed{e} vpon{e} first, And of the contrarie.

  +------------------+---+---+---+
  | Doubled{e}       | 6 | 1 | 8 |
  +------------------+---+---+---+
  | to be doubled{e} | 3 | 0 | 9 |
  +------------------+---+---+---+

    [Headnote: Chapter VI. Multiplication.]

  [Sidenote: Definition of Multiplication. Multiplier. Multiplicand.
  Product.]

Multiplicacio{u}n of nombre by hym-self other by a-nother, w{i}t{h}
p{ro}posid{e} .2. nombres, [is] the fyndyng of the third{e}, That so
oft conteyneth{e} that other, as ther ben vnytes in the oþ{er}. In
multiplicacio{u}n .2. nombres pryncipally ben necessary, that is to
sey, the nombre multiplying and the nombre to be multiplied{e},
as here;--twies fyve. [The number multiplying] is designed{e}
adu{er}bially. The nombre to be multiplied{e} resceyveth{e} a
no{m}i{n}all{e} appellacio{u}n, as twies .5. 5. is the nombre
multiplied{e}, and twies is the nombre to be multipliede.

  +-----------------+-----+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
  | Resultans       |[{9}]| 1 | 0 || 1 | 3 | 2 | 6 | 6 | 8 | 0 | 0 | 8 |
  +-----------------+-----+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
  | Multiplicand{us}|  .  | . | 5 || . | . | 4 | . | 3 | 4 | 0 | 0 | 4 |
  +-----------------+-----+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
  | Multiplicans    |  .  | 2 | 2 || . | 3 | 3 | 2 | 2 | 2 | . | . | . |
  +-----------------+-----+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+

Also me may thervpon{e} to assigne the. 3. nombre, the which{e} is
[*Fol. 51b] cleped{e} p{ro}duct or p{ro}venient, of takyng out of one
fro another: as twyes .5 is .10., 5. the nombre to be multiplied{e},
and .2. the multipliant, and. 10. as before is come therof. And
vnderstonde wele, that of the multipliant may be made the nombre to
be multiplied{e}, and of the contrarie, remaynyng eu{er} the same some,
and herof{e} cometh{e} the comen speche, that seith{e} all nombre is
converted{e} by Multiplying in hym-self{e}.

  +----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+
  |  1 |  2 |  3 |  4 |  5 |   6    |  7 |  8 |  9 |  10 |
  +----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+
  |  2 |  4 |  6 |  8 | 10 |10[{10}]| 14 | 16 | 18 |  20 |
  +----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+
  |  3 |  6 |  9 | 12 | 15 |  18    | 21 | 24 | 27 |  30 |
  +----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+
  |  4 |  8 | 12 | 16 | 20 |  24    | 28 | 32 | 36 |  40 |
  +----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+
  |  5 | 10 | 15 | 20 | 25 |  30    | 35 | 40 | 45 |  50 |
  +----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+
  |  6 | 12 | 18 | 24 | 30 |  36    | 42 | 48 | 56 |  60 |
  +----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+
  |  7 | 14 | 21 | 28 | 35 |  42    | 49 | 56 | 63 |  70 |
  +----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+
  |  8 | 16 | 24 | 32 | 40 |  48    | 56 | 64 | 72 |  80 |
  +----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+
  |  9 | 18 | 27 | 36 | 45 |  54    | 63 | 72 | 81 |  90 |
  +----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+
  | 10 | 20 | 30 | 40 | 50 |  60    | 70 | 80 | 90 | 100 |
  +----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+

    [Headnote: The Cases of Multiplication.]

  [Sidenote: There are 6 rules of Multiplication. (1) Digit by digit.
  See the table above. (2) Digit by article. (3) Composite by digit.]

And ther ben .6 rules of Multiplicacio{u}n; ffirst, yf a digit multiplie
a digit, considr{e} how many of vnytees ben betwix the digit by
multiplying and his .10. beth{e} to-gedre accompted{e}, and so oft
w{i}t{h}-draw the digit multiplying, vnder the article of his
deno{m}i{n}acio{u}n. Example of grace. If thow wolt wete how moch{e} is
.4. tymes .8., [{11}]se how many vnytees ben betwix .8.[{12}] and .10.
to-geder rekened{e}, and it shew{i}t{h} that .2.: withdraw ther-for the
quat{e}rnary, of the article of his deno{m}i{n}acion twies, of .40., And
ther remayneth{e} .32., that is, to some of all{e} the
multiplicacio{u}n. Wher-vpon for more evidence and declaracion the
seid{e} table is made. Whan a digit multiplieth{e} an article, thow most
bryng the digit into þe digit, of þe which{e} the article [has][{13}]
his name, and eu{er}y vnyte shall{e} stond{e} for .10., and eu{er}y
article an .100. Whan the digit multiplieth{e} a nombre componed{e},
þ{o}u most bryng the digit into aiþ{er} part of the nombre componed{e},
so þ{a}t digit be had into digit by the first rule, into an article by
þe second{e} rule; and aft{er}ward{e} Ioyne the p{ro}duccio{u}n, and
þ{er}e wol be the some totall{e}.

  +----------------+---+---+--++---+---+--++---+---+--++---+---+---+---+
  |Resultans       | 1 | 2 | 6|| 7 | 3 | 6|| 1 | 2 | 0|| 1 | 2 | 0 | 8 |
  +----------------+---+---+--++---+---+--++---+---+--++---+---+---+---+
  |Multiplicand{us}|   |   | 2||   | 3 | 2||   |   | 6||   |   |   | 4 |
  +----------------+---+---+--++---+---+--++---+---+--++---+---+---+---+
  |Multiplicans    |   | 6 | 3|| 2 | 3 |  ||   | 2 | 0||   | 3 | 0 | 2 |
  +----------------+---+---+--++---+---+--++---+---+--++---+---+---+---+

  [Sidenote: (4) Article by article. (5) Composite by article.
  (6) Composite by composite. How to set down your numbers. If the
  result is a digit, an article, or a composite. Multiply next by
 the last but one, and so on.]

Whan an article multiplieth{e} an article, the digit wherof he is
named{e} is to be brought Into the digit wherof the oþ{er} is named{e},
and eu{er}y vnyte wol be worth{e} [*Fol. 52.] an .100., and eu{er}y
article. a .1000. Whan an article multiplieth{e} a nombre componed{e},
thow most bryng the digit of the article into aither part of the nombre
componed{e}; and Ioyne the p{ro}duccio{u}n, and eu{er}y article wol be
worth{e} .100., and eu{er}y vnyte .10., and so woll{e} the some be
open{e}. Whan a nombre componed{e} multiplieth{e} a nombre componed{e},
eu{er}y p{ar}t of the nombre multiplying is to be had{e} into eu{er}y
p{ar}t of the nombre to be multiplied{e}, and so shall{e} the digit be
had{e} twies, onys in the digit, that other in the article. The article
also twies, ones in the digit, that other in the article. Therfor yf
thow wilt any nombre by hym-self other by any other multiplie, write the
nombre to be multiplied{e} in the ou{er} ordre by his differences, The
nombre multiplying in the lower ordre by his differences, so that the
first of the lower ordre be vnder the last of the ou{er} ordre. This
done, of the multiplying, the last is to be had{e} into the last of the
nombre to be multiplied{e}. Wherof than wolle grow a digit, an article,
other a nombre componed{e}. If it be a digit, even above the figure
multiplying is hede write his digit that come of, as it appereth{e}
here:--

  +-----------------------+---+
  | The resultant         | 6 |
  +-----------------------+---+
  | To be multiplied{e}   | 3 |
  +-----------------------+---+
  | Þe nombre multipliyng | 2 |
  +-----------------------+---+

And yf an article had be writ ou{er} the fig{ur}e multiplying his hede,
put a cifre þ{er} and transferre the article toward{e} the lift hand{e},
as thus:--

  +-------------------------+---+---+
  | The resultant           | 1 | 0 |
  +-------------------------+---+---+
  | to be multiplied{e}     |   | 5 |
  +-------------------------+---+---+
  | þe nombre m{u}ltipliyng |   | 2 |
  +-------------------------+---+---+

And yf a nombre componed{e} be writ ou{er} the figure multyplying is
hede, write the digit in the nombre componed{e} is place, and sette the
article to the lift hand{e}, as thus:--

  +------------------------+---+---+
  | Resultant              | 1 | 2 |
  +------------------------+---+---+
  | to be multiplied{e}    |   | 4 |
  +------------------------+---+---+
  | the nombre multipliyng |   | 3 |
  +------------------------+---+---+

This done, me most bryng the last save one of the multipliyng into the
last of þe nombre to be multiplied{e}, and se what comyth{e} therof as
before, and so do w{i}t{h} all{e}, tille me come to the first of the
nombre multiplying, that must be brought into the last of the nombre to
be multiplied{e}, wherof growith{e} oþ{er} a digit, an article, [*Fol.
52b] other a nombre componed{e}. If it be a digit, In the place of the
ou{er}er, sette a-side, as here:

  +--------------------------+---+---+
  | Resultant                | 6 | 6 |
  +--------------------------+---+---+
  | to be multiplied{e}      |   | 3 |
  +--------------------------+---+---+
  | the nombre m{u}ltipliyng | 2 | 2 |
  +--------------------------+---+---+

If an article happe, there put a cifre in his place, and put hym to the
lift hand{e}, as here:

  +-------------------------+---+---+---+
  | The resultant           | 1 | 1 | 0 |
  +-------------------------+---+---+---+
  | to be multiplied{e}     |   |   | 5 |
  +-------------------------+---+---+---+
  | þe nombre m{u}ltiplying |   | 2 | 2 |
  +-------------------------+---+---+---+

If it be a nombre componed{e}, in the place of the ou{er}er sette
a-side, write a digit that[{14}] is a p{ar}t of the componed{e}, and
sette on the left hond{e} the article, as here:

  +-----------------------------+---+-------+---+
  | The resultant               | 1 |3[{15}]| 2 |
  +-----------------------------+---+-------+---+
  | to be m{u}ltiplied{e}       |   |       | 4 |
  +-----------------------------+---+-------+---+
  | þe nombr{e} m{u}ltiplia{n}t |   |   3   | 3 |
  +-----------------------------+---+-------+---+

  [Sidenote: Then antery the multiplier one place. Work as before.
  How to deal with ciphers.]

That done, sette forward{e} the figures of the nombre multiplying by oo
difference, so that the first of the multipliant be vnder the last save
one of the nombre to be multiplied{e}, the other by o place sette
forward{e}. Than me shall{e} bryng{e} the last of the m{u}ltipliant in
hym to be multiplied{e}, vnder the which{e} is the first multipliant.
And than wolle growe oþ{er} a digit, an article, or a componed{e}
nombre. If it be a digit, adde hym even above his hede; If it be an
article, transferre hym to the lift side; And if it be a nombre
componed{e}, adde a digit to the figure above his hede, and sette to the
lift hand{e} the article. And all{e}-wayes eu{er}y figure of the nombre
multipliant is to be brought to the last save one nombre to be
multiplied{e}, til me come to the first of the multipliant, where me
shall{e} wirche as it is seid{e} before of the first, and aft{er}ward{e}
to put forward{e} the figures by o difference and one till{e} they
all{e} be multiplied{e}. And yf it happe that the first figure of þe
multipliant be a cifre, and boue it is sette the figure signyficatif{e},
write a cifre in the place of the figur{e} sette a-side, as thus,
{et}c.:

  +---------------------+---+---+---+
  | The resultant       | 1 | 2 | 0 |
  +---------------------+---+---+---+
  | to be multiplied{e} |   |   | 6 |
  +---------------------+---+---+---+
  | the multipliant     |   | 2 | 0 |
  +---------------------+---+---+---+

  [Sidenote: How to deal with ciphers.]

And yf a cifre happe in the lower order be-twix the first and the last,
and even above be sette the fig{ur}e signyficatif, leve it vntouched{e},
as here:--

  +---------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
  | The resultant       | 2 | 2 | 6 | 4 | 4 |
  +---------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
  | To be multiplied{e} |   |   | 2 | 2 | 2 |
  +---------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
  | The multipliant     | 1 | 0 | 2 |   |   |
  +---------------------+---+---+---+---+---+

And yf the space above sette be void{e}, in that place write thow a
cifre. And yf the cifre happe betwix þe first and the last to be
m{u}ltiplied{e}, me most sette forward{e} the ordre of the figures by
thair{e} differences, for oft of duccio{u}n of figur{e}s in cifres
nought is the resultant, as here,

  +-----------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
  | Resultant             | 8 | 0 | 0 | 8 |   |
  +-----------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
  | to be m{u}ltiplied{e} | 4 | 0 | 0 | 4 |   |
  +-----------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
  | the m{u}ltipliant     | 2 | . | . | . |   |
  +-----------------------+---+---+---+---+---+

[*Fol. 53.] wherof it is evident and open, yf that the first figure of
the nombre be to be multiplied{e} be a cifre, vndir it shall{e} be none
sette as here:--

  +-----------------------+---+---+--------+
  | Resultant             | 3 | 2 |0[{16}] |
  +-----------------------+---+---+--------+
  | To be m{u}ltiplied{e} |   | 8 |   0    |
  +-----------------------+---+---+--------+
  | The m{u}ltipliant     |   | 4 |        |
  +-----------------------+---+---+--------+

  [Sidenote: Leave room between the rows of figures.]

Vnder[stand] also that in multiplicacio{u}n, divisio{u}n, and of rootis
the extraccio{u}n, competently me may leve a mydel space betwix .2.
ordres of figures, that me may write there what is come of addyng other
with{e}-drawyng, lest any thynge shold{e} be ou{er}-hipped{e} and sette
out of mynde.

    [Headnote: Chapter VII. Division.]

  [Sidenote: Definition of division. Dividend, Divisor, Quotient.
  How to set down your Sum. An example. Examples.]

For to dyvyde oo nombre by a-nother, it is of .2. nombres p{ro}posed{e},
It is forto depart the moder nombre into as many p{ar}tis as ben of
vnytees in the lasse nombre. And note wele that in makyng{e} of
dyvysio{u}n ther ben .3. nombres necessary: that is to sey, the nombre
to be dyvyded{e}; the nombre dyvydyng and the nombre exeant, other how
oft, or quocient. Ay shall{e} the nombre that is to be dyvyded{e} be
more, other at the lest even{e} w{i}t{h} the nombre the dyvysere, yf the
nombre shall{e} be mad{e} by hole nombres. Therfor yf thow wolt any
nombre dyvyde, write the nombre to be dyvyded{e} in þe ou{er}er
bordur{e} by his differences, the dyviser{e} in the lower ordur{e} by
his differences, so that the last of the dyviser be vnder the last of
the nombre to be dyvyde, the next last vnder the next last, and so of
the others, yf it may competently be done; as here:--

  +------------------+---+---+---+
  | The residue      |   | 2 | 7 |
  +------------------+---+---+---+
  | The quotient     |   |   | 5 |
  +------------------+---+---+---+
  | To be dyvyded{e} | 3 | 4 | 2 |
  +------------------+---+---+---+
  | The dyvyser      |   | 6 | 3 |
  +------------------+---+---+---+

  +--------------+---+---+----+---+---++---+---+---++---+---+---+
  | Residuu{m}   |   |   | 8 ||   |   ||   | 2 | 7 ||   | 2 | 6 |
  +--------------+---+---+---++---+---++---+---+---++---+---+---+
  | Quociens     |   | 2 | 1 || 2 | 2 ||   |   | 5 ||   |   | 9 |
  +--------------+---+---+---++---+---++---+---+---++---+---+---+
  | Diuidend{us} | 6 | 8 | 0 || 6 | 6 || 3 | 4 | 2 || 3 | 3 | 2 |
  +--------------+---+---+---++---+---++---+---+---++---+---+---+
  | Diuiser      | 3 | 2 |   || 3 |   ||   | 6 | 3 ||   | 3 | 4 |
  +--------------+---+---+---++---+---++---+---+---++---+---+---+

  [Sidenote: When the last of the divisor must not be set below the
  last of the dividend. How to begin.]

And ther ben .2. causes whan the last figure may not be sette vnder the
last, other that the last of the lower nombre may not be w{i}t{h}-draw
of the last of the ou{er}er nombre for it is lasse than the lower, other
how be it, that it myght be w{i}t{h}-draw as for hym-self fro the
ou{er}er the remenaunt may not so oft of them above, other yf þe last of
the lower be even to the figure above his hede, and þe next last oþ{er}
the figure be-fore þ{a}t be more þan the figure above sette. [*Fol.
53^2.] These so ordeyned{e}, me most wirch{e} from the last figure of þe
nombre of the dyvyser, and se how oft it may be w{i}t{h}-draw of and fro
the figure aboue his hede, namly so that the remen{au}nt may be take of
so oft, and to se the residue as here:--

  [Sidenote: An example.]

  +------------------+---+---+---+
  | The residue      |   | 2 | 6 |
  +------------------+---+---+---+
  | The quocient     |   |   | 9 |
  +------------------+---+---+---+
  | To be dyvyded{e} | 3 | 3 | 2 |
  +------------------+---+---+---+
  | The dyvyser      |   | 3 | 4 |
  +------------------+---+---+---+

  [Sidenote: Where to set the quotiente. Examples.]

And note wele that me may not with{e}-draw more than .9. tymes nether
lasse than ones. Therfor se how oft þe figures of the lower ordre may be
w{i}t{h}-draw fro the figures of the ou{er}er, and the nombre that
shew{i}t{h} þe q{u}ocient most be writ ou{er} the hede of þat figure,
vnder the which{e} the first figure is, of the dyviser; And by that
figure me most with{e}-draw all{e} oþ{er} figures of the lower ordir and
that of the figures aboue thair{e} hedis. This so don{e}, me most sette
forward{e} þe figures of the diuiser by o difference toward{es} the
right hond{e} and worch{e} as before; and thus:--

  +--------------+---+---+---+---+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
  | Residuu{m}   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||   |   |   |   | . | 1 | 2 |
  +--------------+---+---+---+---+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
  | quo{ciens}   |   |   |   | 6 | 5 | 4 ||   |   |   | 2 | 0 | 0 | 4 |
  +--------------+---+---+---+---+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
  | Diuidend{us} | 3 | 5 | 5 | 1 | 2 | 2 || 8 | 8 | 6 | 3 | 7 | 0 | 4 |
  +--------------+---+---+---+---+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
  | Diuisor      |   | 5 | 4 | 3 |   |   || 4 | 4 | 2 | 3 |   |   |   |
  +--------------+---+---+---+---+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+---+---+

  +------------------+---+---+---+---+---+---+
  | The quocient     |   |   |   | 6 | 5 | 4 |
  +------------------+---+---+---+---+---+---+
  | To be dyvyded{e} | 3 | 5 | 5 | 1 | 2 | 2 |
  +------------------+---+---+---+---+---+---+
  | The dyvyser      |   | 5 | 4 | 3 |   |   |
  +------------------+---+---+---+---+---+---+

  [Sidenote: A special case.]

And yf it happ{e} after þe settyng forward{e} of the fig{ur}es þ{a}t þe
last of the divisor may not so oft be w{i}t{h}draw of the fig{ur}e above
his hede, above þat fig{ur}e vnder the which{e} the first of the diuiser
is writ me most sette a cifre in ordre of the nombre quocient, and sette
the fig{ur}es forward{e} as be-fore be o difference alone, and so me
shall{e} do in all{e} nombres to be dyvided{e}, for where the dyviser
may not be w{i}t{h}-draw me most sette there a cifre, and sette
forward{e} the figures; as here:--

  +------------------+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
  | The residue      |   |   |   |   |   | 1 | 2 |
  |------------------+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
  | The quocient     |   |   |   | 2 | 0 | 0 | 4 |
  |------------------+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
  | To be dyvyded{e} | 8 | 8 | 6 | 3 | 7 | 0 | 4 |
  |------------------+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
  | The dyvyser      | 4 | 4 | 2 | 3 |   |   |   |
  +------------------+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+

  [Sidenote: Another example. What the quotient shows. How to prove
  your division, or multiplication.]

And me shall{e} not cesse fro such{e} settyng of fig{ur}es forward{e},
nether of settyng{e} of þe quocient into the dyviser, neþ{er} of
subt{ra}ccio{u}n of the dyvyser, till{e} the first of the dyvyser be
w{i}t{h}-draw fro þe first to be divided{e}. The which{e} don{e}, or
ought,[{17}] oþ{er} nought shall{e} remayne: and yf it be ought,[{17}]
kepe it in the tables, And eu{er} vny it to þe diviser. And yf þ{o}u
wilt wete how many vnytees of þe divisio{u}n [*Fol. 53^3.] wol growe to
the nombre of the diviser{e}, the nombre quocient wol shewe it: and whan
such{e} divisio{u}n is made, and þ{o}u lust p{ro}ve yf thow have wele
done or no, Multiplie the quocient by the diviser, And the same
fig{ur}es wolle come ayene that thow haddest bifore and none other. And
yf ought be residue, than w{i}t{h} addicio{u}n therof shall{e} come the
same figures: And so multiplicacio{u}n p{ro}vith{e} divisio{u}n, and
dyvisio{u}n multiplicacio{u}n: as thus, yf multiplicacio{u}n be made,
divide it by the multipliant, and the nombre quocient wol shewe the
nombre that was to be multiplied{e}, {et}c.

    [Headnote: Chapter VIII. Progression.]

  [Sidenote: Definition of Progression. Natural Progression. Broken
  Progression. The 1st rule for Natural Progression. The second rule.
  The first rule of Broken Progression. The second rule.]

Progressio{u}n is of nombre after egall{e} excesse fro oone or tweyn{e}
take ag{r}egacio{u}n. of p{ro}gressio{u}n one is naturell{e} or
co{n}tynuell{e}, þ{a}t oþ{er} broken and discontynuell{e}. Naturell{e}
it is, whan me begynneth{e} w{i}t{h} one, and kepeth{e} ordure
ou{er}lepyng one; as .1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6., {et}c., so þ{a}t the nombre
folowyng{e} passith{e} the other be-fore in one. Broken it is, whan me
lepith{e} fro o nombre till{e} another, and kepith{e} not the contynuel
ordir{e}; as 1. 3. 5. 7. 9, {et}c. Ay me may begynne w{i}t{h} .2., as
þus; .2. 4. 6. 8., {et}c., and the nombre folowyng passeth{e} the others
by-fore by .2. And note wele, that naturell{e} p{ro}gressio{u}n ay
begynneth{e} w{i}t{h} one, and Int{er}cise or broken p{ro}gressio{u}n,
omwhile begynnyth{e} w{i}th one, omwhile w{i}t{h} twayn{e}. Of
p{ro}gressio{u}n naturell .2. rules ther be yove, of the which{e} the
first is this; whan the p{ro}gressio{u}n naturell{e} endith{e} in even
nombre, by the half therof multiplie þe next totall{e} ou{er}er{e}
nombre; Example of grace: .1. 2. 3. 4. Multiplie .5. by .2. and so .10.
cometh{e} of, that is the totall{e} nombre þ{er}of. The second{e} rule
is such{e}, whan the p{ro}gressio{u}n naturell{e} endith{e} in nombre
od{e}. Take the more porcio{u}n of the oddes, and multiplie therby the
totall{e} nombre. Example of grace 1. 2. 3. 4. 5., multiplie .5. by .3,
and thryes .5. shall{e} be resultant. so the nombre totall{e} is .15. Of
p{ro}gresio{u}n int{er}cise, ther ben also .2.[{18}] rules; and þe first
is þis: Whan the Int{er}cise p{ro}gression endith{e} in even nombre by
half therof multiplie the next nombre to þat half{e} as .2.[{18}] 4. 6.
Multiplie .4. by .3. so þat is thryes .4., and .12. the nombre of all{e}
the p{ro}gressio{u}n, woll{e} folow. The second{e} rule is this: whan
the p{ro}gressio{u}n int{er}scise endith{e} in od{e}, take þe more
porcio{u}n of all{e} þe nombre, [*Fol. 53^4.] and multiplie by
hym-self{e}; as .1. 3. 5. Multiplie .3. by hym-self{e}, and þe some of
all{e} wolle be .9., {et}c.

    [Headnote: Chapter IX. Extraction of Roots.]

  [Sidenote: The preamble of the extraction of roots. Linear,
  superficial, and solid numbers. Superficial numbers. Square numbers.
  The root of a square number. Notes of some examples of square roots
  here interpolated. Solid numbers. Three dimensions of solids. Cubic
  numbers. All cubics are solid numbers. No number may be both linear
  and solid. Unity is not a number.]

Here folowith{e} the extraccio{u}n of rotis, and first in nombre
q{ua}drat{es}. Wherfor me shall{e} se what is a nombre quadrat, and what
is the rote of a nombre quadrat, and what it is to draw out the rote of
a nombre. And before other note this divisio{u}n: Of nombres one is
lyneal, anoþ{er} sup{er}ficiall{e}, anoþ{er} quadrat, anoþ{er} cubik{e}
or hoole. lyneal is that þat is considred{e} after the p{ro}cesse,
havyng{e} no respect to the direccio{u}n of nombre in nombre, As a lyne
hath{e} but one dymensio{u}n that is to sey after the length{e}. Nombre
sup{er}ficial is þ{a}t cometh{e} of ledyng{e} of oo nombre into
a-nother, wherfor it is called{e} sup{er}ficial, for it hath{e} .2.
nombres notyng or mesuryng{e} hym, as a sup{er}ficiall{e} thyng{e}
hath{e} .2. dimensions, þ{a}t is to sey length{e} and brede. And for
bycause a nombre may be had{e} in a-nother by .2. man{er}s, þ{a}t is to
sey other in hym-self{e}, oþ{er} in anoþ{er}, Vnderstond{e} yf it be had
in hym-self, It is a quadrat. ffor dyvisio{u}n write by vnytes, hath{e}
.4. sides even as a quadrangill{e}. and yf the nombre be had{e} in
a-noþ{er}, the nombre is sup{er}ficiel and not quadrat, as .2. had{e} in
.3. maketh{e} .6. that is þe first nombre sup{er}ficiell{e}; wherfor it
is open þat all{e} nombre quadrat is sup{er}ficiel, and not
co{n}u{er}tid{e}. The rote of a nombre quadrat is þat nombre that is had
of hym-self, as twies .2. makith{e} 4. and .4. is the first nombre
quadrat, and 2. is his rote. 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. / The rote of
the more quadrat .3. 1. 4. 2. 6. The most nombre quadrat 9. 8. 7. 5.
9. 3. 4. 7. 6. / the remenent ou{er} the quadrat .6. 0. 8. 4. 5. / The
first caas of nombre quadrat .5. 4. 7. 5. 6. The rote .2. 3. 4. The
second{e} caas .3. 8. 4. 5. The rote .6. 2. The third{e} caas .2. 8. 1.
9. The rote .5. 3. The .4. caas .3. 2. 1. The rote .1. 7. / The 5. caas
.9. 1. 2. 0. 4. / The rote 3. 0. 2. The solid{e} nombre or cubik{e} is
þat þ{a}t comytħe of double ledyng of nombre in nombre; And it is
cleped{e} a solid{e} body that hath{e} þ{er}-in .3 [dimensions] þat is
to sey, length{e}, brede, and thiknesse. so þ{a}t nombre hath{e} .3.
nombres to be brought forth{e} in hym. But nombre may be had{e} twies in
nombre, for other it is had{e} in hym-self{e}, oþ{er} in a-noþ{er}. If a
nombre be had{e} twies in hym-self, oþ{er} ones in his quadrat, þ{a}t is
the same, þ{a}t a cubik{e} [*Fol. 54.] is, And is the same that is
solide. And yf a nombre twies be had{e} in a-noþ{er}, the nombre is
cleped{e} solide and not cubik{e}, as twies .3. and þ{a}t .2. makith{e}
.12. Wherfor it is opyn{e} that all{e} cubik{e} nombre is solid{e}, and
not {con}u{er}tid{e}. Cubik{e} is þ{a}t nombre þat comyth{e} of
ledyng{e} of hym-self{e} twyes, or ones in his quadrat. And here-by it
is open that o nombre is the roote of a quadrat and of a cubik{e}.
Natheles the same nombre is not q{ua}drat and cubik{e}. Opyn{e} it is
also that all{e} nombres may be a rote to a q{ua}drat and cubik{e}, but
not all{e} nombre quadrat or cubik{e}. Therfor sithen þe ledyng{e} of
vnyte in hym-self ones or twies nought cometh{e} but vnytes, Seith{e}
Boice in Arsemetrik{e}, that vnyte potencially is al nombre, and none in
act. And vndirstond{e} wele also that betwix euery .2. quadrat{es} ther
is a meene p{ro}porcionall{e}, That is opened{e} thus; lede the rote of
o quadrat into the rote of the oþ{er} quadrat, and þan wolle þe meene
shew.

  [Sidenote: Examples of square roots.]

  +-------------+-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-++-+---+------+-+
  | Residuu{m}  | | |0| || | | |4|| | |0| | || |   |   0  | |
  +-------------+-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-++-+---+------+-+
  | Quadrand{e} |4|3|5|6||3|0|2|9||1|7|4|2|4||1| 9 |   3  |6|
  +-------------+-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-++-+---+------+-+
  | Duplum      |1|2| | ||1|0| | ||2| |6| | || |[8]|[{19}]| |
  +-------------+-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-++-+---+------+-+
  | Subduplu{m} | |6| |6|| |5| |5||1| |3| |2|| | 4 |      |4|
  +-------------+-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-++-+---+------+-+

  [Sidenote: A note on mean proportionals.]

Also betwix the next .2. cubikis, me may fynde a double meene, that is
to sey a more meene and a lesse. The more meene thus, as to bryng{e} the
rote of the lesse into a quadrat of the more. The lesse thus, If the
rote of the more be brought Into the quadrat of the lesse.

    [Headnote: Chapter X. Extraction of Square Root.]

  [Sidenote: To find a square root. Begin with the last odd place.
  Find the nearest square root of that number, subtract, double it,
  and set the double one to the right. Find the second figure by
  division. Multiply the double by the second figure, and add after
  it the square of the second figure, and subtract.]

[{20}]To draw a rote of the nombre quadrat it is What-eu{er} nombre be
p{ro}posed{e} to fynde his rote and to se yf it be quadrat. And yf it be
not quadrat the rote of the most quadrat fynde out, vnder the nombre
p{ro}posed{e}. Therfor yf thow wilt the rote of any quadrat nombre draw
out, write the nombre by his differences, and compt the nombre of the
figures, and wete yf it be od{e} or even. And yf it be even, than most
thow begynne worche vnder the last save one. And yf it be od{e} w{i}t{h}
the last; and forto sey it shortly, al-weyes fro the last od{e} me
shall{e} begynne. Therfor vnder the last in an od place sette, me most
fynd{e} a digit, the which{e} lad{e} in hym-self{e} it puttith{e} away
that, þat is ou{er} his hede, oþ{er} as neigh{e} as me may: suche a
digit found{e} and w{i}t{h}draw fro his ou{er}er, me most double that
digit and sette the double vnder the next figure toward{e} the right
hond{e}, and his vnder double vnder hym. That done, than me most
fy{n}d{e} a-noþ{er} digit vnder the next figure bifore the doubled{e},
the which{e} [*Fol. 54b] brought in double setteth{e} a-way all{e} that
is ou{er} his hede as to reward{e} of the doubled{e}: Than brought into
hym-self settith{e} all away in respect of hym-self, Other do it as nye
as it may be do: other me may w{i}t{h}-draw the digit [{21}][last]
found{e}, and lede hym in double or double hym, and after in
hym-self{e}; Than Ioyne to-geder the p{ro}duccion{e} of them bothe, So
that the first figure of the last p{ro}duct be added{e} before the first
of the first p{ro}duct{es}, the second{e} of the first, {et}c. and so
forth{e}, subtrahe fro the totall{e} nombre in respect of þe digit.

  [Sidenote: Examples.]

  +------------------+-+-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-++---+-+---+-+---+-+-+
  | The residue      | | | | | || | | | | ||   | |   |5| 4 |3|2|
  +------------------+-+-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-++---+-+---+-+---+-+-+
  | To be quadred{e} |4|1|2|0|9||1|5|1|3|9|| 9 |0| 0 |5| 4 |3|2|
  +------------------+-+-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-++---+-+---+-+---+-+-+
  | The double       | |4|0| | || |2| |4| ||   |6|   |0|   | |0|
  +------------------+-+-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-++---+-+---+-+---+-+-+
  | The vnder double |2| |0| |3||1| |2| |3||[3]| |[0]| |[0]| |0|
  +------------------+-+-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-++---+-+---+-+---+-+-+

  [Sidenote: Special cases. The residue.]

And if it hap þ{a}t no digit may be found{e}, Than sette a cifre vndre
a cifre, and cesse not till{e} thow fynde a digit; and whan thow hast
founde it to double it, neþ{er} to sette the doubled{e} forward{e}
nether the vnder doubled{e}, Till thow fynde vndre the first figure a
digit, the which{e} lad{e} in all{e} double, settyng away all{e} that is
ou{er} hym in respect of the doubled{e}: Than lede hym into hym-self{e},
and put a-way all{e} in regard{e} of hym, other as nygh{e} as thow
maist. That done, other ought or nought wolle be the residue. If nought,
than it shewith{e} that a nombre componed{e} was the quadrat, and his
rote a digit last found{e} w{i}t{h} vnder{e}-double other vndirdoubles,
so that it be sette be-fore: And yf ought[{22}] remayn{e}, that
shew{i}t{h} that the nombre p{ro}posed{e} was not quadrat,[{23}]
[[wher-vpon{e} se the table in the next side of the next leef{e}.]]
but a digit [last found with the subduple or subduples is]

  [Sidenote: This table is constructed for use in cube root sums,
  giving the value of ab.^2]

  +---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+---------+-----+---------+
  | 1 |   2 |   3 |   4 |   5 |   6 |    7    |   8 |     9   |
  +---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+---------+-----+---------+
  | 2 |   8 |  12 |  16 |  20 |  24 |   28    |  32 |    36   |
  +---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+---------+-----+---------+
  | 3 |  18 |  27 |  36 |  45 |  54 |   63    |  72 |    81   |
  +---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+---------+-----+---------+
  | 4 |  32 |  48 |  64 |  80 |  96 |112[{24}]| 128 |   144   |
  +---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+---------+-----+---------+
  | 5 |  50 |  75 | 100 | 125 | 150 |   175   | 200 |   225   |
  +---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+---------+-----+---------+
  | 6 |  72 | 108 | 144 | 180 | 216 |   252   | 288 |   324   |
  +---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+---------+-----+---------+
  | 7 |  98 | 147 | 196 | 245 | 294 |   343   | 393 |   441   |
  +---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+---------+-----+---------+
  | 8 | 128 | 192 | 256 | 320 | 384 |   448   | 512 |   576   |
  +---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+---------+-----+---------+
  | 9 | 168 | 243 | 324 | 405 | 486 |   567   | 648 |729[{25}]|
  +---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+---------+-----+---------+

  [Sidenote: How to prove the square root without or with a remainder.]

The rote of the most quadrat conteyned{e} vndre the nombre
p{ro}posed{e}. Therfor yf thow wilt p{ro}ve yf thow have wele do or no,
Multiplie the digit last found{e} w{i}t{h} the vnder-double oþ{er}
vnder-doublis, and thow shalt fynde the same figures that thow haddest
before; And so that nought be the [*Fol. 55.] residue. And yf thow have
any residue, than w{i}t{h} the addicio{u}n þ{er}of that is res{er}ued{e}
w{i}t{h}-out in thy table, thow shalt fynd{e} thi first figures as thow
haddest them before, {et}c.

    [Headnote: Chapter XI. Extraction of Cube Root.]

  [Sidenote: Definition of a cubic number and a cube root. Mark off
  the places in threes. Find the first digit; treble it and place it
  under the next but one, and multiply by the digit. Then find the
  second digit. Multiply the first triplate and the second digit, twice
  by this digit. Subtract. Examples.]

Heere folowith{e} the extraccio{u}n of rotis in cubik{e} nombres;
wher-for me most se what is a nombre cubik{e}, and what is his roote,
And what is the extraccio{u}n of a rote. A nombre cubik{e} it is, as it
is before declared{e}, that cometh{e} of ledyng of any nombre twies in
hym-self{e}, other ones in his quadrat. The rote of a nombre cubik{e} is
the nombre that is twies had{e} in hy{m}-self{e}, or ones in his
quadrat. Wher-thurgh{e} it is open, that eu{er}y nombre quadrat or
cubik{e} have the same rote, as it is seid{e} before. And forto draw out
the rote of a cubik{e}, It is first to fynd{e} þe nombr{e} p{ro}posed{e}
yf it be a cubik{e}; And yf it be not, than thow most make extraccio{u}n
of his rote of the most cubik{e} vndre the nombre p{ro}posid{e} his rote
found{e}. Therfor p{ro}posed{e} some nombre, whos cubical rote þ{o}u
woldest draw out; First thow most compt the figures by fourthes, that is
to sey in the place of thousand{es}; And vnder the last thousand{e}
place, thow most fynde a digit, the which{e} lad{e} in hym-self cubikly
puttith{e} a-way that þat is ou{er} his hede as in respect of hym, other
as nygh{e} as thow maist. That done, thow most trebill{e} the digit, and
that triplat is to be put vnder the .3. next figure toward{e} the right
hond{e}, And the vnder-trebill{e} vnder the trebill{e}; Than me most
fynd{e} a digit vndre the next figure bifore the triplat, the which{e}
w{i}t{h} his vnder-trebill{e} had into a trebill{e}, aft{er}warde other
vnder[trebille][{26}] had in his p{ro}duccio{u}n, putteth{e} a-way
all{e} that is ou{er} it in regard{e} of[{27}] [the triplat. Then lade
in hymself puttithe away that þat is over his hede as in respect of hym,
other as nyghe as thou maist:] That done, thow most trebill{e} the digit
ayene, and the triplat is to be sette vnder the next .3. figure as
before, And the vnder-trebill{e} vnder the trebill{e}: and than most
thow sette forward{e} the first triplat w{i}t{h} his vndre-trebill{e} by
.2. differences. And than most thow fynde a digit vnder the next figure
before the triplat, the which{e} with{e} his vnder-t{r}iplat had in his
triplat afterward{e}, other vnder-treblis lad in p{ro}duct [*Fol. 55b]
It sitteth{e} a-way ałł that is ou{er} his hede in respect of the
triplat than had in hym-self cubikly,[{28}] [[it setteth{e} a-way all{e}
his respect]] or as nygh{e} as ye may.

  +----------------+--+-+-+-+-+-+---++--+-+-+-+-+--++----+-+--+-+--+
  | Residuu{m}     |  | | | | | | 5 ||  | | | | | 4||   1|0|1 |9|  |
  +----------------+--+-+-+-+-+-+---++--+-+-+-+-+--++----+-+--+-+--+
  | Cubicandu{s}   | 8|3|6|5|4|3| 2 || 3|0|0|7|6| 7|| 1 1|6|6 |7|  |
  +----------------+--+-+-+-+-+-+---++--+-+-+-+-+--++----+-+--+-+--+
  | Triplum        |  | |6|0| | |   ||  | | |1|8|  ||    | |4 | |  |
  +----------------+--+-+-+-+-+-+---++--+-+-+---+--++----+-+--+-+--+
  | Subt{r}iplu{m} | 2| | |0| | |[3]||  | |6| | | 7||   2| |  |2|  |
  +----------------+--+-+-+-+-+-+---++--+-+-+-+-+--++----+-+--+-+--+

  [Sidenote: Continue this process till the first figure is reached.
  Examples. The residue. Special cases. Special case.]

Nother me shall{e} not cesse of the fyndyng{e} of that digit, neither of
his triplacio{u}n, neþ{er} of the triplat-is [{29}]anteriorac{i}o{u}n,
that is to sey, settyng forward{e} by .2. differences, Ne therof the
vndre-triple to be put vndre the triple, Nether of the multiplicacio{u}n
þ{er}of, Neither of the subtraccio{u}n, till{e} it come to the first
figure, vnder the which{e} is a digitall{e} nombre to be found{e}, the
which{e} with{e} his vndre-treblis most be had{e} in tribles,
After-ward{e} w{i}t{h}out vnder-treblis to be had{e} into produccio{u}n,
settyng away all{e} that is ou{er} the hed{e} of the triplat nombre,
After had into hymself{e} cubikly, and sette all{e}-way that is ou{er}
hym.

  +------------------+---+---+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+
  | To be cubiced{e} | 1 | 7 | 2 | 8 || 3 | 2 | 7 | 6 | 8 |
  +------------------+---+---+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+
  | The triple       |   |   | 3 | 2 ||   |   |   | 9 |   |
  +------------------+---+---+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+
  | The vnder triple |   |   | 1 | 2 ||   |[3]|   | 3 | 3 |
  +------------------+---+---+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+

Also note wele that the p{ro}ducc{i}on comyng{e} of the ledyng of a
digite found{e}[{30}] [[w{i}t{h} an vndre-triple / other of an
vndre-triple in a triple or triplat is And after-ward{e} w{i}t{h} out
vndre-triple other vndre-triplis in the p{ro}duct and ayene that
p{ro}duct that cometh{e} of the ledyng{e} of a digit found{e} in
hym-self{e} cubicall{e}]] me may adde to, and also w{i}t{h}-draw fro of
the totall{e} nombre sette above that digit so found{e}.[{31}] [[as ther
had be a divisio{u}n made as it is opened{e} before]] That done ought or
nought most be the residue. If it be nought, It is open that the nombre
p{ro}posed{e} was a cubik{e} nombre, And his rote a digit founde last
w{i}t{h} the vnder-triples: If the rote therof wex bad{e} in
hym-self{e}, and afterward{e} p{ro}duct they shall{e} make the first
fig{ur}es. And yf ought be in residue, kepe that w{i}t{h}out in the
table; and it is open{e} that the nombre was not a cubik{e}. but a digit
last founde w{i}t{h} the vndirtriplis is rote of the most cubik{e} vndre
the nombre p{ro}posed{e} conteyned{e}, the which{e} rote yf it be had{e}
in hym-self{e}, And aft{er}ward{e} in a p{ro}duct of that shall{e} growe
the most cubik{e} vndre the nombre p{ro}posed{e} conteyned{e}, And yf
that be added{e} to a cubik{e} the residue res{er}ued{e} in the table,
woll{e} make the same figures that ye had{e} first. [*Fol. 56.] And yf
no digit after the anterioracio{u}n[{32}] may not be found{e}, than put
ther{e} a cifre vndre a cifre vndir the third{e} figure, And put
forward{e} þe fig{ur}es. Note also wele that yf in the nombre
p{ro}posed{e} ther ben no place of thowsand{es}, me most begynne vnder
the first figure in the extraccio{u}n of the rote. some vsen forto
distingue the nombre by threes, and ay begynne forto wirch{e} vndre the
first of the last t{er}nary other unco{m}plete nombre, the which{e}
maner of op{er}acio{u}n accordeth{e} w{i}t{h} that before. And this at
this tyme suffiseth{e} in extraccio{u}n of nombres quadrat or cubik{es}
{et}c.

  [Sidenote: Examples.]

  +-------------------+---+--+------+--+--+--+--++--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
  | The residue       |   |  |      |  |  |  | 0||  |  |  |  |  | 1| 1|
  +-------------------+---+--+------+--+--+--+--++--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
  | The cubicand{us}  | 8 | 0|   0  | 0| 0| 0| 0|| 8| 2| 4| 2| 4| 1| 9|
  +-------------------+---+--+------+--+--+--+--++--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
  | The triple        |   |  |[{33}]| 0| 0|  |  ||  |  | 6|  |  |  |  |
  +-------------------+---+--+------+--+--+--+--++--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
  | The vndert{r}iple |[2]|  |      | 0| 0|  |  || 2|  |  | 6| 2|  |  |
  +-------------------+---+--+------+--+--+--+--++--+--+--+--+--+--+--+


    [Headnote: Table of Numbers, &c.]

  [Sidenote: A table of numbers; probably from the Abacus.]

   1   2         3              4               5              6
  one. x. an. hundred{e}/ a thowsand{e}/ x. thowsand{e}/ An hundred{e}
                     7
  thowsand{e}/ A thowsand{e} tymes a thowsand{e}/ x. thousand{e} tymes

  a thousand{e}/ An hundred{e} thousand{e} tymes a thousand{e} A

  thousand{e} thousand{e} tymes a thousand{e}/ this is the x place

    {et}c.


[Ende.]


FOOTNOTES (The Art of Nombryng):

  [1: MS. Materiall{e}.]
  [2: MS. Formall{e}.]
  [3: ‘the’ in MS.]
  [4: ‘be’ in MS.]
  [5: ‘and’ in MS.]
  [6: ‘is’ in MS.]
  [7: 6 in MS.]
  [8: 0 in MS.]
  [9: 2 in MS.]
  [10: _sic._]
  [11: ‘And’ inserted in MS.]
  [12: ‘4 the’ inserted in MS.]
  [13: ‘to’ in MS.]
  [14: ‘that’ repeated in MS.]
  [15: ‘1’ in MS.]
  [16: Blank in MS.]
  [17: ‘nought’ in MS.]
  [18: 3 written for 2 in MS.]
  [19: 7 in MS.]
  [20: runs on in MS.]
  [21: ‘so’ in MS.]
  [22: ‘nought’ in MS.]
  [23: MS. adds here: ‘wher-vpon{e} se the table in the next side of
    the next leef{e}.’]
  [24: 110 in MS.]
  [25: 0 in MS.]
  [26: double in MS.]
  [27: ‘it hym-self{e}’ in MS.]
  [28: MS. adds here: ‘it setteth{e} a-way all{e} his respect.’]
  [29: ‘aucterioracio{u}n’ in MS.]
  [30: MS. adds here: ’w{i}t{h} an vndre-triple / other of an
    vndre-triple in a triple or triplat is And after-ward{e} w{i}t{h}
    out vndre-triple other vndre-triplis in the p{ro}duct and ayene
    that p{ro}duct that cometh{e} of the ledyng{e} of a digit found{e}
    in hym-self{e} cubicall{e}’ /]
  [31: MS. adds here: ‘as ther had be a divisio{u}n made as it is
    opened{e} before.’]
  [32: MS. anteriocacio{u}n.]
  [33: 4 in MS.]




Accomptynge by counters.

  [Transcriber’s Note:

  The original text was printed as a single continuous paragraph, with
  no break between speakers; all examples were shown inline. It has been
  broken up for this e-text.]


  [*116b]

  ¶ The seconde dialoge of accomptynge by counters.

_Mayster._

Nowe that you haue learned the commen kyndes of Arithmetyke with the
penne, you shall se the same art in cou{n}ters: whiche feate doth not
only serue for them that can not write and rede, but also for them that
can do bothe, but haue not at some tymes theyr penne or tables redye
with them. This sorte is in two fourmes co{m}menly. The one by lynes,
and the other without lynes: in that y^t hath lynes, the lynes do stande
for the order of places: and in y^t that hath no lynes, there must be
sette in theyr stede so many counters as shall nede, for eche lyne one,
and they shall supplye the stede of the lynes.

_S._ By examples I shuld better p{er}ceaue your meanynge.

_M._ For example of the [*117a.] ly[*]nes:

  ----1-0-0-0-0-0--
  ----1-0-0-0-0----
  -X--1-0-0-0------
  ----1-0-0--------
  ----1-0----------
  ----1------------

  [Sidenote: Numeration.]

Lo here you se .vi. lynes whiche stande for syxe places so that the
nethermost standeth for y^e fyrst place, and the next aboue it, for the
second: and so vpward tyll you come to the hyghest, which is the syxte
lyne, and standeth for the syxte place. Now what is the valewe of euery
place or lyne, you may perceaue by the figures whiche I haue set on
them, which is accordynge as you learned before in the Numeration of
figures by the penne: for the fyrste place is the place of vnities or
ones, and euery counter set in that lyne betokeneth but one: {and} the
seconde lyne is the place of 10, for euery counter there, standeth for
10. The thyrd lyne the place of hundredes: the fourth of thousandes:
{and} so forth.

_S._ Syr I do perceaue that the same order is here of lynes, as was in
the other figures [*117b] by places, so that you shall not nede longer
to stande about Numeration, excepte there be any other difference.

_M._ Yf you do vndersta{n}de it, then how wyll you set 1543?

_S._ Thus, as I suppose.

  -------
  -X--1--
  ----5--
  ----4--
  ----3--

_M._ You haue set y^e places truely, but your figures be not mete for
this vse: for the metest figure in this behalfe, is the figure of a
cou{n}ter round, as you se here, where I haue expressed that same summe.

  -------------

  -X--o--------
       o
  -------------

  ----o-o-o-o--

  ----o-o-o----

_S._ So that you haue not one figure for 2, nor 3, nor 4, and so forth,
but as many digettes as you haue, you set in the lowest lyne: and for
euery 10 you set one in the second line: and so of other. But I know not
by what reason you set that one counter for 500 betwene two lynes.

_M._ you shall remember this, that when so euer you nede to set downe 5,
50, or 500, or 5000, or so forth any other nomber, whose numerator
[*118a] is 5, you shall set one counter for it, in the next space aboue
the lyne that it hath his denomination of, as in this example of that
500, bycause the numerator is 5, it must be set in a voyd space: and
bycause the denominator is hundred, I knowe that his place is the voyde
space next aboue hundredes, that is to say, aboue the thyrd lyne. And
farther you shall marke, that in all workynge by this sorte, yf you
shall sette downe any summe betwene 4 and 10, for the fyrste parte of
that nomber you shall set downe 5, & then so many counters more, as
there reste no{m}bers aboue 5. And this is true bothe of digettes and
articles. And for example I wyll set downe this su{m}me 287965,

  -X-----------

  ------o-o----
           o
  ------o-o-o--
           o
  -X----o-o----
         o
  ----o-o-o-o--
       o
  ----o--------
       o
  -------------

which su{m}me yf you marke well, you nede none other exa{m}ples for to
lerne the numeration of [*118b] this forme. But this shal you marke,
that as you dyd in the other kynde of arithmetike, set a pricke in the
places of thousa{n}des, in this worke you shall sette a starre, as you
se here.

    [Headnote: Addition on the Counting Board.]

  [Sidenote: Addition.]

_S._ Then I perceave numeration, but I praye you, howe shall I do in
this arte to adde two summes or more together?

_M._ The easyest way in this arte is, to adde but 2 su{m}mes at ones
together: how be it you may adde more, as I wyll tell you anone.
Therfore when you wyll adde two su{m}mes, you shall fyrst set downe one
of them, it forseth not whiche, {and} then by it drawe a lyne crosse the
other lynes. And afterward set downe the other su{m}me, so that that
lyne may be betwene them, as yf you wolde adde 2659 to 8342, you must
set your su{m}mes as you se

  -------------|-----------
       o       |
  -X--o-o-o----|--o-o------
               |   o
  ----o-o-o----|--o--------
               |   o
  ----o-o-o-o--|-----------
               |   o
  ----o-o------|--o-o-o-o--

here. And then yf you lyst, you [*119a] may adde the one to the other in
the same place, or els you may adde them both together in a newe place:
which waye, bycause it is moste playnest, I wyll showe you fyrst.
Therfore wyl I begynne at the vnites, whiche in the fyrst su{m}me is but
2, {and} in y^e second su{m}me 9, that maketh 11, those do I take vp,
and for them I set 11 in the new roume, thus,

  -------------|-------|-------
       o       |       |
  -X--o-o-o----|--o-o--|-------
               |   o   |
  ----o-o-o----|--o----|-------
               |    o  |
  ----o-o-o-o--|-------|-o-----
               |       |
  -------------|-------|-o-----

Then do I take vp all y^e articles vnder a hundred, which in the fyrst
su{m}me are 40, and in the second summe 50, that maketh 90: or you may
saye better, that in the fyrste summe there are 4 articles of 10, and in
the seconde summe 5, which make 9, but then take hede that you sette
them in theyr [*119b] ryght lynes as you se here.

  -----------|----------|-------------
       o     |          |
  -X--o-o-o--|--o-o-----|-------------
             |   o      |
  ----o-o-o--|--o-------|-------------
             |          |   o
  -----------|----------|--o-o-o-o-o--
             |          |
  -----------|----------|--o----------

Where I haue taken awaye 40 fro{m} the fyrste su{m}me, and 50 from y^e
second, and in theyr stede I haue set 90 in the thyrde, whiche I haue
set playnely y^t you myght well perceaue it: how be it seynge that 90
with the 10 that was in y^e thyrd roume all redy, doth make 100,
I myghte better for those 6 cou{n}ters set 1 in the thyrde lyne, thus:

  ----------

  -X--------

  ----o-----

  ----------

  ----o-----

For it is all one summe as you may se, but it is beste, neuer to set 5
cou{n}ters in any line, for that may be done with 1 cou{n}ter in a
hygher place.

_S._ I iudge that good reaso{n}, for many are vnnedefull, where one wyll
serue.

_M._ Well, then [*120a] wyll I adde forth of hundredes: I fynde 3 in the
fyrste summe, and 6 in the seconde, whiche make 900, them do I take vp
{and} set in the thyrd roume where is one hundred all redy, to whiche I
put 900, and it wyll be 1000, therfore I set one cou{n}ter in the fourth
lyne for them all, as you se here.

  -----------|-------|--------
       o     |       |
  -X--o-o-o--|--o-o--|--o-----
             |       |
  -----------|-------|--------
             |       |
  -----------|-------|--------
             |       |
  -----------|-------|--o-----

Then adde I y^e thousandes together, whiche in the fyrst su{m}me are
8000, {and} in y^e second 2000, that maketh 10000: them do I take vp
fro{m} those two places, and for them I set one counter in the fyfte
lyne, and then appereth as you se, to be 11001, for so many doth amount
of the addition of 8342 to 2659.

  ----o-----

  -X--o-----

  ----------

  ----------

  ----o-----

[*120b] _S._ Syr, this I do perceave: but how shall I set one su{m}me to
an other, not chaungynge them to a thyrde place?

_M._ Marke well how I do it: I wyll adde together 65436, and 3245,
whiche fyrste I set downe thus.

  -------------|--------------
               |      o
  -------------|--o-----------
               |   o
  -X--o-o-o----|--------------
               |
  ----o-o------|--o-o-o-o-----
               |
  ----o-o-o-o--|--o-o-o-------
       o       |       o
  -------------|--o-----------

Then do I begynne with the smalest, which in the fyrst summe is 5, that
do I take vp, and wold put to the other 5 in the seconde summe, sauynge
that two counters can not be set in a voyd place of 5, but for them
bothe I must set 1 in the seconde lyne, which is the place of 10,
therfore I take vp the 5 of the fyrst su{m}me, {and} the 5 of the
seco{n}de, and for them I set 1 in the seco{n}d lyne, [*121a] as you se
here.

  -------------|--------------
               |   o
  -------------|--o-----------
               |   o
  -X--o-o-o----|--------------
               |
  ----o-o------|--o-o-o-o-----
               |
  ----o-o-o-o--|--o-o-o-o-----
               |
  -------------|--o-----------

Then do I lyke wayes take vp the 4 counters of the fyrste su{m}me {and}
seconde lyne (which make 40) and adde them to the 4 counters of the same
lyne, in the second su{m}me, and it maketh 80, But as I sayde I maye not
conueniently set aboue 4 cou{n}ters in one lyne, therfore to those 4
that I toke vp in the fyrst su{m}me, I take one also of the seconde
su{m}me, and then haue I taken vp 50, for whiche 5 counters I sette
downe one in the space ouer y^e second lyne, as here doth appere.

  -----------|--------------
             |   o
  -----------|--o-----------
             |   o
  -X--o-o-o--|--------------
             |
  ----o-o----|--o-o-o-o-----
             |   o
  -----------|--o-o-o-------
             |
  -----------|--o-----------

[*121b.] and then is there 80, as well w^t those 4 counters, as yf I had
set downe y^e other 4 also. Now do I take the 200 in the fyrste su{m}me,
and adde them to the 400 in the seconde summe, and it maketh 600,
therfore I take vp the 2 counters in the fyrste summe, and 3 of them in
the seconde summe, and for them 5 I set 1 in y^e space aboue, thus.

  -----------|------------
             |   o
  -----------|--o---------
             |   o
  -X--o-o-o--|------------
             |   o
  -----------|--o---------
             |   o
  -----------|--o-o-o-----
             |
  -----------|--o---------

Then I take y^e 3000 in y^e fyrste su{m}me, vnto whiche there are none
in the second summe agreynge, therfore I do onely remoue those 3
counters from the fyrste summe into the seconde, as here doth appere.

  ----|-------------
      |  o
  ----|---o---------
      |  o
  -X--|---o-o-o-----
      |  o
  ----|-o-----------
      |  o
  ----|---o-o-o-----
      |
  ----|---o---------

[*122a.] And so you see the hole su{m}me, that amou{n}teth of the
addytio{n} of 65436 with 3245 to be 6868[1]. And yf you haue marked
these two exa{m}ples well, you nede no farther enstructio{n} in Addition
of 2 only summes: but yf you haue more then two summes to adde, you may
adde them thus. Fyrst adde two of them, and then adde the thyrde, and
y^e fourth, or more yf there be so many: as yf I wolde adde 2679 with
4286 and 1391. Fyrste I adde the two fyrste summes thus.

  -------------|-----------|--------------
               |           |   o
  -X--o-o------|--o-o-o-o--|--o-----------
       o       |           |   o
  ----o--------|--o-o------|--o-o-o-o-----
       o       |   o       |   o
  ----o-o------|--o-o-o----|--o-----------
       o       |   o       |   o
  ----o-o-o-o--|--o--------|--------------

[*122b.] And then I adde the thyrde thereto thus. And so of more yf you
haue them.

  -------------|-----------|------------
               |   o       |       o
  -X--o--------|--o--------|--o-o-o-----
               |   o       |
  ----o-o-o----|--o-o-o-o--|--o-o-o-----
       o       |   o       |   o
  ----o-o-o-o--|----o------|------------
               |   o       |   o
  ----o--------|-----------|--o---------


    [Headnote: Subtraction on the Counting Board.]

  [Sidenote: Subtraction.]

_S._ Nowe I thynke beste that you passe forth to Subtraction, except
there be any wayes to examyn this maner of Addition, then I thynke that
were good to be knowen nexte.

_M._ There is the same profe here that is in the other Addition by the
penne, I meane Subtraction, for that onely is a sure waye: but
consyderynge that Subtraction must be fyrste knowen, I wyl fyrste teache
you the arte of Subtraction, and that by this example: I wolde subtracte
2892 out of 8746. These summes must I set downe as I dyd in Addition:
but here it is best [*116a (_sic_).] to set the lesser no{m}ber fyrste,
thus.

  -------------|--------------
               |     o
  -X--o-o------|--o-o-o-------
       o       |   o
  ----o-o-o----|--o-o---------
       o       |
  ----o-o-o-o--|--o-o-o-o-----
               |   o
  ----o-o------|--o-----------

Then shall I begynne to subtracte the greatest nombres fyrste (contrary
to the vse of the penne) y^t is the thousandes in this exa{m}ple:
therfore I fynd amongest the thousandes 2, for which I withdrawe so many
fro{m} the seconde summe (where are 8) and so remayneth there 6, as this
exa{m}ple showeth.

  -------------+--------------
               |   o
  -+-----------+--o-----------
       o       |   o
  ----o-o-o----+--o-o---------
       o       |
  ----o-o-o-o--+--o-o-o-o-----
               |   o
  ----o-o------+--o-----------

Then do I lyke wayes with the hundredes, of whiche in the fyrste summe
[*116b] I fynde 8, and is the seconde summe but 7, out of whiche I can
not take 8, therfore thus muste I do: I muste loke how moche my summe
dyffereth from 10, whiche I fynde here to be 2, then must I bate for my
su{m}me of 800, one thousande, and set downe the excesse of hundredes,
that is to saye 2, for so moche 100[0] is more then I shuld take vp.
Therfore fro{m} the fyrste su{m}me I take that 800, and from the second
su{m}me where are 6000, I take vp one thousande, and leue 5000; but then
set I downe the 200 unto the 700 y^t are there all redye, and make them
900 thus.

  -------------+--------------
               |   o
  -+-----------+--------------
               |   o
  -------------+--o-o-o-o-----
         o     |
  ----o-o-o-o--+--o-o-o-o-----
               |   o
  ----o-o------+--o-----------

Then come I to the articles of te{n}nes where in the fyrste su{m}me I
fynde 90, [*117a] and in the seconde su{m}me but only 40: Now
consyderyng that 90 can not be bated from 40, I loke how moche y^t 90
doth dyffer from the next summe aboue it, that is 100 (or elles whiche
is all to one effecte, I loke how moch 9 doth dyffer fro{m} 10) {and} I
fynd it to be 1, then in the stede of that 90, I do take from the second
summe 100: but consyderynge that it is 10 to moche, I set downe 1 in y^e
nexte lyne beneth for it, as you se here.

  ---------+------------
           |   o
  -+-------+------------
           |   o
  ---------+--o-o-o-----
           |   o
  ---------+------------
           |   o
  ----o-o--+--o---------

Sauynge that here I haue set one counter in y^e space in stede of 5 in
y^e nexte lyne. And thus haue I subtracted all saue two, which I must
bate from the 6 in the second summe, and there wyll remayne 4, thus.

  ----+--------------
      |   o
  -+--+--------------
      |   o
  ----+--o-o-o-------
      |   o
  ----+--------------
      |
  ----+--o-o-o-o-----

So y^t yf I subtracte 2892 fro{m} 8746, the remayner wyll be 5854,
[*117b] And that this is truely wrought, you maye proue by Addition: for
yf you adde to this remayner the same su{m}me that you dyd subtracte,
then wyll the formar su{m}me 8746 amount agayne.

_S._ That wyll I proue: and fyrst I set the su{m}me that was subtracted,
which was 2892, {and} the{n} the remayner 5854, thus.

  --------------+--------------
                |       o
  -||--o-o------+--------------
        o       |     o
  -----o-o-o----+--o-o-o-------
        o       |   o
  -----o-o-o-o--+--------------
                |
  -----o-o------+--o-o-o-o-----

Then do I adde fyrst y^e 2 to 4, whiche maketh 6, so take I vp 5 of
those counters, and in theyr stede I sette 1 in the space, as here
appereth.

  --------------+------------
                |     o
  -||--o-o------+------------
        o       |   o
  -----o-o-o----+--o-o-o-----
        o       |   o
  -----o-o-o-o--+------------
                |   o
  --------------+--o---------

[*118a] Then do I adde the 90 nexte aboue to the 50, and it maketh 140,
therfore I take vp those 6 counters, and for them I sette 1 to the
hundredes in y^e thyrde lyne, {and} 4 in y^e second lyne, thus.

  ------------+--------------
              |   o
  -||--o-o----+--------------
        o     |   o
  -----o-o-o--+--o-o-o-o-----
              |
  ------------+--o-o-o-o-----
              |   o
  ------------+----o---------

Then do I come to the hundredes, of whiche I fynde 8 in the fyrst summe,
and 9 in y^e second, that maketh 1700, therfore I take vp those 9
counters, and in theyr stede I sette 1 in the .iiii. lyne, and 1 in the
space nexte beneth, and 2 in the thyrde lyne, as you se here.

  ----------+--------------
            |   o
  -||--o-o--+--o-----------
            |   o
  ----------+--o-o---------
            |
  ----------+--o-o-o-o-----
            |   o
  ----------+--o-----------

Then is there lefte in the fyrste summe but only 2000, whiche I shall
take vp from thence, and set [*118b] in the same lyne in y^e second
su{m}me, to y^e one y^t is there all redy: {and} then wyll the hole
su{m}me appere (as you may wel se) to be 8746, which was y^e fyrst
grosse summe, {and} therfore I do perceaue, that I hadde well subtracted
before. And thus you may se how Subtraction maye be tryed by Addition.

  ----+--------------
      |     o
  -X--+--o-o-o-------
      |     o
  ----+--o-o---------
      |
  ----+--o-o-o-o-----
      |   o
  ----+----o---------

_S._ I perceaue the same order here w^t cou{n}ters, y^t I lerned before
in figures.

_M._ Then let me se howe can you trye Addition by Subtraction.

_S._ Fyrste I wyl set forth this exa{m}ple of Additio{n} where I haue
added 2189 to 4988, and the hole su{m}me appereth to be 7177,

  --------------+-----------+----------
                |           |   o
  -||--o-o------+--o-o-o-o--+--o-o-----
                |   o       |
  -----o--------+--o-o-o-o--+--o-------
        o       |   o       |   o
  -----o-o-o----+--o-o-o----+--o-o-----
        o       |   o       |   o
  -----o-o-o-o--+--o-o-o----+--o-o-----

[*119a] Nowe to trye whether that su{m}me be well added or no, I wyll
subtract one of the fyrst two su{m}mes from the thyrd, and yf I haue
well done y^e remayner wyll be lyke that other su{m}me. As for example:
I wyll subtracte the fyrste summe from the thyrde, whiche I set thus in
theyr order.

  --------------+----------
                |   o
  -||--o-o------+--o-o-----
                |
  -----o--------+--o-------
        o       |   o
  -----o-o-o----+--o-o-----
        o       |   o
  -----o-o-o-o--+--o-o-----

Then do I subtract 2000 of the fyrste summe fro{m} y^e second su{m}me,
and then remayneth there 5000 thus.

  -------------+----------
               |   o
  -X-----------+-----------
               |
  ----o--------+--o-------
       o       |   o
  ----o-o-o----+--o-o-----
       o       |   o
  ----o-o-o-o--+--o-o-----

Then in the thyrd lyne, I subtract y^e 100 of the fyrste summe, fro{m}
the second su{m}me, where is onely 100 also, and then in y^e thyrde lyne
resteth nothyng. Then in the second lyne with his space ouer hym,
I fynde 80, which I shuld subtract [*119b] from the other su{m}me, then
seyng there are but only 70 I must take it out of some hygher summe,
which is here only 5000, therfore I take vp 5000, and seyng that it is
to moch by 4920, I sette downe so many in the seconde roume, whiche with
the 70 beynge there all redy do make 4990, & then the summes doth stande
thus.

  --------------+--------------
                |
  -||-----------+--o-o-o-o-----
                |   o
  --------------+--o-o-o-o-----
                |   o
  --------------+--o-o-o-o-----
        o       |   o
  -----o-o-o-o--+--o-o---------

Yet remayneth there in the fyrst su{m}me 9, to be bated from the second
summe, where in that place of vnities dothe appere only 7, then I muste
bate a hygher su{m}me, that is to saye 10, but seynge that 10 is more
then 9 (which I shulde abate) by 1, therfore shall I take vp one counter
from the seconde lyne, {and} set downe the same in the fyrst [*120a] or
lowest lyne, as you se here.

  -----+--------------
       |
  -||--+--o-o-o-o-----
       |   o
  -----+--o-o-o-o-----
       |   o
  -----+--o-o-o-------
       |   o
  -----+--o-o-o-------

And so haue I ended this worke, {and} the su{m}me appereth to be y^e
same, whiche was y^e seconde summe of my addition, and therfore I
perceaue, I haue wel done.

_M._ To stande longer about this, it is but folye: excepte that this you
maye also vnderstande, that many do begynne to subtracte with counters,
not at the hyghest su{m}me, as I haue taught you, but at the
nethermoste, as they do vse to adde: and when the summe to be abatyd,
in any lyne appeareth greater then the other, then do they borowe one of
the next hygher roume, as for example: yf they shuld abate 1846 from
2378, they set y^e summes thus.

  --------------+------------
                |
  -||--o--------+--o-o-------
        o       |
  -----o-o-o----+--o-o-o-----
                |   o
  -----o-o-o-o--+--o-o-------
        o       |   o
  -----o--------+--o-o-o-----

[*120b] And fyrste they take 6 whiche is in the lower lyne, and his
space from 8 in the same roumes, in y^e second su{m}me, and yet there
remayneth 2 counters in the lowest lyne. Then in the second lyne must 4
be subtracte from 7, and so remayneth there 3. Then 8 in the thyrde lyne
and his space, from 3 of the second summe can not be, therfore do they
bate it from a hygher roume, that is, from 1000, and bycause that 1000
is to moch by 200, therfore must I sette downe 200 in the thyrde lyne,
after I haue taken vp 1000 from the fourth lyne: then is there yet 1000
in the fourth lyne of the fyrst summe, whiche yf I withdrawe from the
seconde summe, then doth all y^e figures stande in this order.

  -----+------------
       |
  -||--+------------
       |   o
  -----+------------
       |
  -----+--o-o-o-----
       |
  -----+--o-o-------

So that (as you se) it differeth not greatly whether you begynne
subtractio{n} at the hygher lynes, or at [*121a] the lower. How be it,
as some menne lyke the one waye beste, so some lyke the other: therfore
you now knowyng bothe, may vse whiche you lyst.

    [Headnote: Multiplication by Counters.]

  [Sidenote: Multiplication.]

But nowe touchynge Multiplicatio{n}: you shall set your no{m}bers in two
roumes, as you dyd in those two other kyndes, but so that the multiplier
be set in the fyrste roume. Then shall you begyn with the hyghest
no{m}bers of y^e seconde roume, and multiply them fyrst after this sort.
Take that ouermost lyne in your fyrst workynge, as yf it were the lowest
lyne, setting on it some mouable marke, as you lyste, and loke how many
counters be in hym, take them vp, and for them set downe the hole
multyplyer, so many tymes as you toke vp counters, reckenyng, I saye
that lyne for the vnites: {and} when you haue so done with the hygheest
no{m}ber then come to the nexte lyne beneth, {and} do euen so with it,
and so with y^e next, tyll you haue done all. And yf there be any nomber
in a space, then for it [*121b] shall you take y^e multiplyer 5 tymes,
and then must you recken that lyne for the vnites whiche is nexte beneth
that space: or els after a shorter way, you shall take only halfe the
multyplyer, but then shall you take the lyne nexte aboue that space, for
the lyne of vnites: but in suche workynge, yf chau{n}ce your multyplyer
be an odde nomber, so that you can not take the halfe of it iustly, then
muste you take the greater halfe, and set downe that, as if that it were
the iuste halfe, and farther you shall set one cou{n}ter in the space
beneth that line, which you recken for the lyne of vnities, or els only
remoue forward the same that is to be multyplyed.

_S._ Yf you set forth an example hereto I thynke I shal perceaue you.

_M._ Take this exa{m}ple: I wold multiply 1542 by 365, therfore I set
y^e nombers thus.

  ------------+--------------
              |
  -||---------+--o-----------
              |   o
  -----o-o-o--+--------------
        o     |
  -----o------+--o-o-o-o-----
        o     |
  ------------+--o-o---------

[*122a] Then fyrste I begynne at the 1000 in y^e hyghest roume, as yf it
were y^e fyrst place, & I take it vp, settynge downe for it so often
(that is ones) the multyplyer, which is 365, thus, as you se here:

  -----------+-----------+------------
             |           |
  -----------+-----------+--o-o-o-----
             |           |   o
  -----------+-----------+--o---------
             |           |   o
  -X---------+-----------+------------ [<-]
             |   o       |
  ----o-o-o--+-----------+------------
       o     |           |
  ----o------+--o-o-o-o--+------------
       o     |           |
  -----------+--o-o------+------------

where for the one counter taken vp from the fourth lyne, I haue sette
downe other 6, whiche make y^e su{m}me of the multyplyer, reckenynge
that fourth lyne, as yf it were the fyrste: whiche thyng I haue marked
by the hand set at the begynnyng of y^e same,

_S._ I perceaue this well: for in dede, this summe that you haue set
downe is 365000, for so moche doth amount [*122b] of 1000, multiplyed by
365.

_M._ Well the{n} to go forth, in the nexte space I fynde one counter
which I remoue forward but take not vp, but do (as in such case I must)
set downe the greater halfe of my multiplier (seyng it is an odde
no{m}ber) which is 182, {and} here I do styll let that fourth place
stand, as yf it were y^e fyrst:

  ------------+-----------+--o-o-o--+--o---------
              |           |   o     |   o
  ------------+-----------+--o------+--o-o-o-----
              |           |   o     |
  -||---------+-----------+---------+--o-o------- [<-]
              |           |         |   o
  -----o-o-o--+-----------+---------+------------
        o     |           |         |
  -----o------+--o-o-o-o--+---------+------------
        o     |           |         |
  ------------+--o-o------+---------+------------

as in this fourme you se, where I haue set this multiplycatio{n} with
y^e other: but for the ease of your vndersta{n}dynge, I haue set a
lytell lyne betwene them: now shulde they both in one su{m}me stand
thus.

  ------------+-----------+--o-o-o-o-o-----
              |           |
  ------------+-----------+--o-o-o-o-------
              |           |   o
  -||---------+-----------+--o-o----------- [<-]
              |           |   o
  -----o-o-o--+-----------+----------------
        o     |           |
  -----o------+--o-o-o-o--+----------------
        o     |           |
  ------------+--o-o------+----------------

[*123a] Howe be it an other fourme to multyplye suche cou{n}ters i{n}
space is this: Fyrst to remoue the fynger to the lyne nexte benethe y^e
space, {and} then to take vp y^e cou{n}ter, {and} to set downe y^e
multiplyer .v. tymes, as here you se.

      ---------+---------+-o-o-o-+------+------+------+------+------+-
               |         |  o    |      |      |      |      |      |
      ---------+---------+-o-----+o-o-o-+o-o-o-+o-o-o-+o-o-o-+o-o-o-+-
               |         |  o    | o    | o    | o    | o    | o    |
      ---------+---------+-------+o-----+------+o-----+o-----+o-----+-
               |         |       | o    | o    | o    | o    | o    |
  [->]-X-o-o-o-+---------+-------+------+------+------+------+------+-
          o    |         |       |      |      |      |      |      |
      ---o-----+-o-o-o-o-+-------+------+------+------+------+------+-
          o    |         |       |      |      |      |      |      |
      ---------+-o-o-----+-------+------+------+------+------+------+-

Which su{m}mes yf you do adde together into one su{m}me, you shal
p{er}ceaue that it wyll be y^e same y^t appeareth of y^e other worki{n}g
before, so that [*123b] bothe sortes are to one entent, but as the other
is much shorter, so this is playner to reason, for suche as haue had
small exercyse in this arte. Not withstandynge you maye adde them in
your mynde before you sette them downe, as in this exa{m}ple, you myghte
haue sayde 5 tymes 300 is 1500, {and} 5 tymes 60 is 300, also 5 tymes 5
is 25, whiche all put together do make 1825, which you maye at one tyme
set downe yf you lyste. But nowe to go forth, I must remoue the hand to
the nexte counters, whiche are in the second lyne, and there must I take
vp those 4 counters, settynge downe for them my multiplyer 4 tymes,
whiche thynge other I maye do at 4 tymes seuerally, or elles I may
gather that hole summe in my mynde fyrste, and then set it downe: as to
saye 4 tymes 300 is 1200: 4 tymes 60 are 240: and 4 tymes 5 make 20: y^t
is in all 1460, y^t shall I set downe also: as here you se.
                                   o
       -----------+-------+-----------+--------------
                  |       |           |
       -----------+-------+--o-o-o-o--+--o-----------
                  |       |   o       |
       -X---------+-------+--o-o------+--o-o-o-o-----
                  |       |   o       |   o
       ----o-o-o--+-------+-----------+--o-----------
            o     |       |           |
  [->] ----o------+-------+-----------+--------------
            o     |       |           |
       -----------+--o-o--+-----------+--------------

[*124a] whiche yf I ioyne in one summe with the formar nombers, it wyll
appeare thus.
                           o
      ---------+-------+----------
               |       |   o
      ---------+-------+--o-------
               |       |
      ---------+-------+--o-o-----
               |       |
      --o-o-o--+-------+-o--------
         o     |       |
 [->] --o------+-------+----------
         o     |       |
      ---------+--o-o--+----------

Then to ende this multiplycation, I remoue the fynger to the lowest
lyne, where are onely 2, them do I take vp, and in theyr stede do I set
downe twyse 365, that is 730, for which I set [*124b] one in the space
aboue the thyrd lyne for 500, and 2 more in the thyrd lyne with that one
that is there all redye, and the reste in theyr order, {and} so haue I
ended the hole summe thus.
                     o
  ---------+-----+------------
           |     |   o
  ---------+-----+--o---------
           |     |
  ---------+-----+--o-o-------
           |     |   o
  --o-o-o--+-----+--o-o-o-----
     o     |     |
  --o------+-----+--o-o-o-----
     o     |     |
  ---------+-----+------------

Wherby you se, that 1542 (which is the nomber of yeares syth Ch[r]ystes
incarnation) beyng multyplyed by 365 (which is the nomber of dayes in
one yeare) dothe amounte vnto 562830, which declareth y^e no{m}ber of
daies sith Chrystes incarnatio{n} vnto the ende of 1542[{1}] yeares.
(besyde 385 dayes and 12 houres for lepe yeares).

_S._ Now wyll I proue by an other exa{m}ple, as this: 40 labourers
(after 6 d. y^e day for eche man) haue wrought 28 dayes, I wold [*125a]
know what theyr wages doth amou{n}t vnto: In this case muste I worke
doublely: fyrst I must multyplye the nomber of the labourers by y^e
wages of a man for one day, so wyll y^e charge of one daye amount: then
secondarely shall I multyply that charge of one daye, by the hole nomber
of dayes, {and} so wyll the hole summe appeare: fyrst therefore I shall
set the su{m}mes thus.

  ------+--------------
        |
  ------+--------------
        |
  ------+--------------
        |
  ------+--o-o-o-o-----
     o  |
  --o---+--------------

Where in the fyrste space is the multyplyer (y^t is one dayes wages for
one man) {and} in the second space is set the nomber of the worke men to
be multyplyed: the{n} saye I, 6 tymes 4 (reckenynge that second lyne as
the lyne of vnites) maketh 24, for whiche summe I shulde set 2 counters
in the thyrde lyne, and 4 in the seconde, therfore do I set 2 in the
thyrde lyne, and let the 4 stand styll in the seconde lyne, thus.[*125b]

  -----+--------------
       |
  -----+--------------
       |
  -----+--o-o---------
       |
  -----+--o-o-o-o-----
       |
  -----+--------------

So apwereth the hole dayes wages to be 240d’. that is 20 s. Then do I
multiply agayn the same summe by the no{m}ber of dayes and fyrste I
sette the nombers, thus.

  ---------+--------------
           |
  ---------+--------------
           |
  ---------+--o-o---------
           |
  --o-o----+--o-o-o-o-----
     o     |
  --o-o-o--+-------------

The{n} bycause there are counters in dyuers lynes, I shall begynne with
the hyghest, and take them vp, settynge for them the multyplyer so many
tymes, as I toke vp counters, y^t is twyse, then wyll y^e su{m}me stande
thus.

  -----+--------------
       |   o
  -----+--------------
       |   o
  -----+--o-----------
       |
  -----+--o-o-o-o-----
       |
  -----+--------------

Then come I to y^e seconde lyne, and take vp those 4 cou{n}ters,
settynge for them the multiplyer foure tymes, so wyll the hole summe
appeare thus.[*126a]

  -----+----------
       |   o
  -----+--o-------
       |   o
  -----+--o-o-----
       |
  -----+--o-o-----
       |
  -----+----------

So is the hole wages of 40 workeme{n}, for 28 dayes (after 6d’. eche
daye for a man) 6720d’. that is 560 s. or 28 l’i.

    [Headnote: Division on the Counting Board.]

  [Sidenote: Diuision.]

_M._ Now if you wold proue Multiplycatio{n}, the surest way is by
Dyuision: therfore wyll I ouer passe it tyll I haue taught you y^e arte
of Diuision, whiche you shall worke thus. Fyrste sette downe the Diuisor
for feare of forgettynge, and then set the nomber that shalbe deuided,
at y^e ryghte syde, so farre from the diuisor, that the quotient may be
set betwene them: as for exa{m}ple: Yf 225 shepe cost 45 l’i. what dyd
euery shepe cost? To knowe this, I shulde diuide the hole summe, that is
45 l’i. by 225, but that can not be, therfore must I fyrste reduce that
45 l’i. into a lesser denomination, as into shyllynges: then I multiply
45 by 20, and it is 900, that summe shall I diuide by the no{m}ber of
[*126b] shepe, whiche is 225, these two nombers therfore I sette thus.

  -------+-----+--------------
         |     |
  -------+-----+--------------
         |     |   o
  --o-o--+-----+--o-o-o-o-----
         |     |
  --o-o--+-----+--------------
     o   |     |
  -------+-----+--------------

Then begynne I at the hyghest lyne of the diuident, and seke how often I
may haue the diuisor therin, and that maye I do 4 tymes, then say I,
4 tymes 2 are 8, whyche yf I take from 9, there resteth but 1, thus

  -------+-----------+--------
         |           |
  -------+-----------+--------
         |           |
  --o-o--+-----------+--o-----
         |           |
  --o-o--+-----------+--------
     o   |           |
  -------+--o-o-o-o--+--------

And bycause I founde the diuisor 4 tymes in the diuidente, I haue set
(as you se) 4 in the myddle roume, which [*127a] is the place of the
quotient: but now must I take the reste of the diuisor as often out of
the remayner: therfore come I to the seconde lyne of the diuisor, sayeng
2 foure tymes make 8, take 8 from 10, {and} there resteth 2, thus.

  ----------+-----------+----------
            |           |
  -||-------+-----------+----------
            |           |
  -----o-o--+-----------+----------
            |           |
  -----o-o--+-----------+--o-o-----
        o   |           |
  ----------+--o-o-o-o--+----------

Then come I to the lowest nomber, which is 5, and multyply it 4 tymes,
so is it 20, that take I from 20, and there remayneth nothynge, so that
I se my quotient to be 4, whiche are in valewe shyllynges, for so was
the diuident: and therby I knowe, that yf 225 shepe dyd coste 45 l’i.
euery shepe coste 4 s.

_S._ This can I do, as you shall perceaue by this exa{m}ple: Yf 160
sowldyars do spende euery moneth 68 l’i. what spendeth eche man? Fyrst
[*127b] bycause I can not diuide the 68 by 160, therfore I wyll turne
the pou{n}des into pennes by multiplicacio{n}, so shall there be
16320 d’. Nowe muste I diuide this su{m}me by the nomber of sowldyars,
therfore I set the{m} i{n} order, thus.

  ---------+-----+--o---------
           |     |   o
  -||------+-----+--o---------
           |     |
  -----o---+-----+--o-o-o-----
        o  |     |
  -----o---+-----+--o-o-------
           |     |
  ---------+-----+------------

Then begyn I at the hyghest place of the diuidente, sekynge my diuisor
there, whiche I fynde ones, Therfore set I 1 in the nether lyne.

_M._ Not in the nether line of the hole summe, but in the nether lyne of
that worke, whiche is the thyrde lyne.

_S._ So standeth it with reason.

_M._ Then thus do they stande.[*128a]

  ---------+-----+------------
           |     |
  -||------+-----+------------
           |     |
  -----o---+--o--+--o-o-o-----
        o  |     |
  -----o---+-----+--o-o-------
           |     |
  ---------+-----+------------

Then seke I agayne in the reste, how often I may fynde my diuisor, and I
se that in the 300 I myghte fynde 100 thre tymes, but then the 60 wyll
not be so often founde in 20, therfore I take 2 for my quotient: then
take I 100 twyse from 300, and there resteth 100, out of whiche with the
20 (that maketh 120) I may take 60 also twyse, and then standeth the
nombers thus,

  ---------+-------+-----
           |       |
  -||------+-------+-----
           |       |
  -----o---+--o----+-----
        o  |       |
  -----o---+-------+-----
           |       |
  ---------+--o-o--+-----

[*128b] where I haue sette the quotient 2 in the lowest lyne: So is
euery sowldyars portion 102 d’. that is 8 s. 6 d’.

_M._ But yet bycause you shall perceaue iustly the reason of Diuision,
it shall be good that you do set your diuisor styll agaynst those
nombres fro{m} whiche you do take it: as by this example I wyll declare.
Yf y^e purchace of 200 acres of ground dyd coste 290 l’i. what dyd one
acre coste? Fyrst wyl I turne the poundes into pennes, so wyll there be
69600 d’· Then in settynge downe these nombers I shall do thus.

  ---------+-----+--------------
           |     |   o
  ----o-o--+-----+--o-----------
           |     |   o
  -X-------+-----+--o-o-o-o-----
           |     |     o
  ---------+-----+--o-----------
           |     |
  ---------+-----+--------------
           |     |
  ---------+-----+--------------

Fyrst set the diuident on the ryghte hande as it oughte, and then
[*129a] the diuisor on the lefte hande agaynst those nombers, fro{m}
which I entende to take hym fyrst as here you se, wher I haue set the
diuisor two lynes hygher the{n} is theyr owne place.

_S._ This is lyke the order of diuision by the penne.

_M._ Truth you say, and nowe must I set y^e quotient of this worke in
the thyrde lyne, for that is the lyne of vnities in respecte to the
diuisor in this worke. Then I seke howe often the diuisor maye be founde
in the diuident, {and} that I fynde 3 tymes, then set I 3 in the thyrde
lyne for the quotient, and take awaye that 60000 fro{m} the diuident,
and farther I do set the diuisor one line lower, as yow se here.

  ----------+---------+--------------
            |         |   o
  -||--o-o--+---------+--o-o-o-o-----
            |         |   o
  ----------+--o-o-o--+----o---------
            |         |
  ----------+---------+--------------
            |         |
  ----------+---------+--------------

[*129b] And then seke I how often the diuisor wyll be taken from the
nomber agaynste it, whiche wyll be 4 tymes and 1 remaynynge.

_S._ But what yf it chaunce that when the diuisor is so remoued, it can
not be ones taken out of the diuident agaynste it?

_M._ Then must the diuisor be set in an other line lower.

_S._ So was it in diuision by the penne, and therfore was there a cypher
set in the quotient: but howe shall that be noted here?

_M._ Here nedeth no token, for the lynes do represente the places: onely
loke that you set your quotient in that place which standeth for vnities
in respecte of the diuisor: but now to returne to the example, I fynde
the diuisor 4 tymes in the diuidente, and 1 remaynynge, for 4 tymes 2
make 8, which I take from 9, and there resteth 1, as this figure
sheweth:

  ----------+-----------+---------
            |           |
  -||--o-o--+-----------+--o------
            |           |   o
  ----------+--o-o-o----+--o------
            |           |
  ----------+--o-o-o-o--+---------
            |           |
  ----------+-----------+---------

and in the myddle space for the quotient I set 4 in the seconde lyne,
whiche is in this worke the place of vnities.[*130a] Then remoue I y^e
diuisor to the next lower line, and seke how often I may haue it in the
dyuident, which I may do here 8 tymes iust, and nothynge remayne, as in
this fourme,

  ----------+-----------+-----
            |           |
  -||--o-o--+-----------+-----
            |           |
  ----------+--o-o-o----+-----
            |           |
  ----------+--o-o-o-o--+-----
            |   o       |
  ----------+--o-o-o----+-----

where you may se that the hole quotient is 348 d’, that is 29 s. wherby
I knowe that so moche coste the purchace of one aker.

_S._ Now resteth the profes of Multiplycatio{n}, and also of Diuisio{n}.

_M._ Ther best profes are eche [*130b] one by the other, for
Multyplication is proued by Diuision, and Diuision by Multiplycation,
as in the worke by the penne you learned.

_S._ Yf that be all, you shall not nede to repete agayne that, y^t was
sufficye{n}tly taughte all redye: and excepte you wyll teache me any
other feate, here maye you make an ende of this arte I suppose.

_M._ So wyll I do as touchynge hole nomber, and as for broken nomber,
I wyll not trouble your wytte with it, tyll you haue practised this so
well, y^t you be full perfecte, so that you nede not to doubte in any
poynte that I haue taught you, and thenne maye I boldly enstructe you in
y^e arte of fractions or broken no{m}ber, wherin I wyll also showe you
the reasons of all that you haue nowe learned. But yet before I make an
ende, I wyll showe you the order of co{m}men castyng, wher in are bothe
pennes, shyllynges, and poundes, procedynge by no grounded reason, but
onely by a receaued [*131a] fourme, and that dyuersly of dyuers men: for
marchau{n}tes vse one fourme, and auditors an other:

    [Headnote: Merchants’ Casting Counters.]

  [Sidenote: Merchants’ casting.]

But fyrste for marchauntes fourme marke this example here,

  o   o o o o
       o
  o   o o o
       o
  o   o o o o
       o
      o o o o o

in which I haue expressed this summe 198 l’i.[{2}] 19 s. 11 d’. So that
you maye se that the lowest lyne serueth for pe{n}nes, the next aboue
for shyllynges, the thyrde for poundes, and the fourth for scores of
pou{n}des. And farther you maye se, that the space betwene pennes and
shyllynges may receaue but one counter (as all other spaces lyke wayes
do) and that one standeth in that place for 6 d’. Lyke wayes betwene the
shyllynges {and} the pou{n}des, one cou{n}ter standeth for 10 s. And
betwene the poundes and 20 l’i. one counter standeth for 10 pou{n}des.
But besyde those you maye see at the left syde of shyllynges, that one
counter standeth alone, {and} betokeneth 5 s. [*131b] So agaynste the
poundes, that one cou{n}ter standeth for 5 l’i. And agaynst the 20
poundes, the one counter standeth for 5 score pou{n}des, that is
100 l’i. so that euery syde counter is 5 tymes so moch as one of them
agaynst whiche he standeth.

  [Sidenote: Auditors’ casting.]

Now for the accompt of auditors take this example.

      o   o   o   o   o     o
  o o o   o o o   o o o   o o o
  o               o       o o

where I haue expressed y^e same su{m}me 198 l’i. 19 s. 11 d’. But here
you se the pe{n}nes stande toward y^e ryght hande, and the other
encreasynge orderly towarde the lefte hande. Agayne you maye se, that
auditours wyll make 2 lynes (yea and more) for pennes, shyllynges, {and}
all other valewes, yf theyr summes extende therto. Also you se, that
they set one counter at the ryght ende of eche rowe, whiche so set there
standeth for 5 of that roume: and on [*132a] the lefte corner of the
rowe it sta{n}deth for 10, of y^e same row. But now yf you wold adde
other subtracte after any of both those sortes, yf you marke y^e order
of y^t other feate which I taught you, you may easely do the same here
without moch teachynge: for in Additio{n} you must fyrst set downe one
su{m}me and to the same set the other orderly, and lyke maner yf you
haue many: but in Subtraction you must sette downe fyrst the greatest
summe, and from it must you abate that other euery denominatio{n} from
his dewe place.

_S._ I do not doubte but with a lytell practise I shall attayne these
bothe: but how shall I multiply and diuide after these fourmes?

_M._ You can not duely do none of both by these sortes, therfore in
suche case, you must resort to your other artes.

_S._ Syr, yet I se not by these sortes how to expresse hu{n}dreddes,
yf they excede one hundred, nother yet thousandes.

_M._ They that vse such accomptes that it excede 200 [*132b] in one
summe, they sette no 5 at the lefte hande of the scores of poundes, but
they set all the hundredes in an other farther rowe {and} 500 at the
lefte hand therof, and the thousandes they set in a farther rowe yet,
{and} at the lefte syde therof they sette the 5000, and in the space
ouer they sette the 10000, and in a hygher rowe 20000, whiche all I haue
expressed in this exa{m}ple,

      o o o o
       o
  o   o o
  o   o o o
      o o o
  o   o o o o
        o
      o o
        o
      o o o
               o o
               o

which is 97869 l’i. 12 s. 9 d’ ob. q. for I had not told you before
where, nother how you shuld set downe farthynges, which (as you se here)
must be set in a voyde space sydelynge beneth the pennes: for q one
counter: for ob. 2 counters: for ob. q. 3 counters: {and} more there can
not be, for 4 farthynges [*133a] do make 1 d’. which must be set in his
dewe place.

    [Headnote: Auditors’ Casting Counters.]

And yf you desyre y^e same summe after audytors maner, lo here it is.

           o o        o               o   o       o
  o o o   o o     o o o   o o o   o o o   o o   o o o
  o                               o                      o o
                                                         o

But in this thyng, you shall take this for suffycyent, and the reste you
shall obserue as you maye se by the working of eche sorte: for the
dyuers wittes of men haue inuented dyuers and sundry wayes almost
vnnumerable. But one feate I shall teache you, whiche not only for the
straungenes and secretnes is moche pleasaunt, but also for the good
co{m}moditie of it ryghte worthy to be well marked. This feate hath ben
vsed aboue 2000 yeares at the leaste, and yet was it neuer come{n}ly
knowen, especyally in Englysshe it was neuer taughte yet. This is the
arte of nombrynge on the hand, with diuers gestures of the fyngers,
expressynge any summe conceaued in the [*133b] mynde. And fyrst to
begynne, yf you wyll expresse any summe vnder 100, you shall expresse it
with your lefte hande: and from 100 vnto 10000, you shall expresse it
with your ryght hande, as here orderly by this table folowynge you may
perceaue.

  +¶ Here foloweth the table
    of the arte of the
      hande+




The arte of nombrynge by the hande.

  [Transcriber’s Note:

  Footnote 3 reads:
    “Bracket ([) denotes new paragraph in original.”
  For this e-text, the brackets have been omitted in favor of restoring
  the paragraph breaks. Changes of speaker (M, S) are also marked by
  paragraphs, as in the previous selection.

  The illustration includes the printed page number 134; there is
  therefore no sidenote *134a. The sidenote for “4” is missing.]


[Illustration: (Numbers as described in text)]

  [Sidenote: 1]

[*134b] In which as you may se 1 is expressed by y^e lyttle fynger of
y^e lefte hande closely and harde croked.

  [Sidenote: 2]

[{3}]2 is declared by lyke bowynge of the weddynge fynger (whiche is the
nexte to the lyttell fynger) together with the lytell fynger.

  [Sidenote: 3]

3 is signified by the myddle fynger bowed in lyke maner, with those
other two.

4 is declared by the bowyng of the myddle fynger and the rynge fynger,
or weddynge fynger, with the other all stretched forth.

  [Sidenote: 5, 6]

5 is represented by the myddle fynger onely bowed.

And 6 by the weddynge fynger only crooked: and this you may marke in
these a certayne order. But now 7, 8, and 9, are expressed w{i}t{h} the
bowynge of the same fyngers as are 1, 2, and 3, but after an other
fourme.

  [Sidenote: 7]

For 7 is declared by the bowynge of the lytell fynger, as is 1, saue
that for 1 the fynger is clasped in, harde {and} [*135a] rounde, but for
to expresse 7, you shall bowe the myddle ioynte of the lytell fynger
only, and holde the other ioyntes streyght.

_S._ Yf you wyll geue me leue to expresse it after my rude maner, thus I
vnderstand your meanyng: that 1 is expressed by crookynge in the lyttell
fynger lyke the head of a bysshoppes bagle: and 7 is declared by the
same fynger bowed lyke a gybbet.

_M._ So I perceaue, you vnderstande it.

  [Sidenote: 8]

Then to expresse 8, you shall bowe after the same maner both the lyttell
fynger and the rynge fynger.

  [Sidenote: 9, 10]

And yf you bowe lyke wayes with them the myddle fynger, then doth it
betoken 9.

Now to expresse 10, you shall bowe your fore fynger rounde, and set the
ende of it on the hyghest ioynte of the thombe.

  [Sidenote: 20]

And for to expresse 20, you must set your fyngers streyght, and the ende
of your thombe to the partitio{n} of the [*135b] fore moste and myddle
fynger.

  [Sidenote: 30]

30 is represented by the ioynynge together of y^e headdes of the
foremost fynger and the thombe.

  [Sidenote: 40]

40 is declared by settynge of the thombe crossewayes on the foremost
fynger.

  [Sidenote: 50]

50 is signified by ryght stretchyng forth of the fyngers ioyntly, and
applyenge of the thombes ende to the partition of the myddle fynger
{and} the rynge fynger, or weddynge fynger.

  [Sidenote: 60]

60 is formed by bendynge of the thombe croked and crossynge it with the
fore fynger.

  [Sidenote: 70]

70 is expressed by the bowynge of the foremost fynger, and settynge the
ende of the thombe between the 2 foremost or hyghest ioyntes of it.

  [Sidenote: 80]

80 is expressed by settynge of the foremost fynger crossewayes on the
thombe, so that 80 dyffereth thus fro{m} 40, that for 80 the forefynger
is set crosse on the thombe, and for 40 the thombe is set crosse ouer
y^e forefinger.

  [Sidenote: 90]

[*136a] 90 is signified, by bendynge the fore fynger, and settyng the
ende of it in the innermost ioynte of y^e thombe, that is euen at the
foote of it. And thus are all the no{m}bers ended vnder 100.

[Sidenote: 11, 12, 13, 21, 22, 23]

_S._ In dede these be all the nombers fro{m} 1 to 10, {and} then all the
tenthes within 100, but this teacyed me not how to expresse 11, 12, 13,
{et}c. 21, 22, 23, {et}c. and such lyke.

_M._ You can lytell vnderstande, yf you can not do that without
teachynge: what is 11? is it not 10 and 1? then expresse 10 as you were
taught, and 1 also, and that is 11: and for 12 expresse 10 and 2: for 23
set 20 and 3: and so for 68 you muste make 60 and there to 8: and so of
all other sortes.

  [Sidenote: 100]

But now yf you wolde represente 100 other any nomber aboue it, you muste
do that with the ryghte hande, after this maner. [You must expresse 100
in the ryght hand, with the lytell fynger so bowed as you dyd expresse 1
in the left hand.

  [Sidenote: 200]

[*136b] And as you expressed 2 in the lefte hande, the same fasshyon in
the ryght hande doth declare 200.

  [Sidenote: 300]

The fourme of 3 in the ryght hand standeth for 300.

  [Sidenote: 400]

The fourme of 4, for 400.

  [Sidenote: 500]

Lykewayes the fourme of 5, for 500.

  [Sidenote: 600]

The fourme of 6, for 600. And to be shorte: loke how you did expresse
single vnities and tenthes in the lefte hande, so must you expresse
vnities {and} tenthes of hundredes, in the ryghte hande.

  [Sidenote: 900]

_S._ I vnderstande you thus: that yf I wold represent 900, I must so
fourme the fyngers of my ryghte hande, as I shuld do in my left hand to
expresse 9,

  [Sidenote: 1000]

And as in my lefte hand I expressed 10, so in my ryght hande must I
expresse 1000.

And so the fourme of euery tenthe in the lefte hande serueth to expresse
lyke no{m}ber of thousa{n}des,

  [Sidenote: 4000]

so y^e fourme of 40 standeth for 4000.

  [Sidenote: 8000]

The fourme of 80 for 8000.

  [Sidenote: 9000]

  [*137a]

  And the fourme of 90 (whiche is
  the greatest) for 9000, and aboue that
  I can not expresse any nomber. _M._
  No not with one fynger: how be it,
  w{i}t{h} dyuers fyngers you maye expresse
  9999, and all at one tyme, and that lac
  keth but 1 of 10000. So that vnder
  10000 you may by your fyngers ex-
  presse any summe. And this shal suf-
  fyce for Numeration on the fyngers.
  And as for Addition, Subtraction,
  Multiplicatio{n}, and Diuision (which
  yet were neuer taught by any man as
  farre as I do knowe) I wyll enstruct
  you after the treatyse of fractions.
  And now for this tyme fare well,
  and loke that you cease not to
  practyse that you haue lear
  ned. _S._ Syr, with moste
  harty mynde I thanke
  you, bothe for your
  good learnyng, {and}
  also your good
  cou{ns}el, which
  (god wyllyng) I truste to folow.


  Finis.


  FOOTNOTES (Accomptynge by counters
  _and_ The arte of nombrynge by the hande):

  [1: 1342 in original.]
  [2: 168 in original.]
  [3: Bracket ([) denotes new paragraph in original.]




APPENDIX I.

+A Treatise on the Numeration of Algorism.+


[_From a MS. of the 14th Century._]

To alle suche even nombrys the most have cifrys as to ten. twenty.
thirtty. an hundred. an thousand and suche other. but ye schal
vnderstonde that a cifre tokeneth nothinge but he maketh other the more
significatyf that comith after hym. Also ye schal vnderstonde that in
nombrys composyt and in alle other nombrys that ben of diverse figurys
ye schal begynne in the ritht syde and to rekene backwarde and so he
schal be wryte as thus--1000. the sifre in the ritht side was first
wryte and yit he tokeneth nothinge to the secunde no the thridde but
thei maken that figure of 1 the more signyficatyf that comith after hem
by as moche as he born oute of his first place where he schuld yf he
stode ther tokene but one. And there he stondith nowe in the ferye place
he tokeneth a thousand as by this rewle. In the first place he tokeneth
but hymself. In the secunde place he tokeneth ten times hymself. In the
thridde place he tokeneth an hundred tymes himself. In the ferye he
tokeneth a thousand tymes himself. In the fyftye place he tokeneth ten
thousand tymes himself. In the sexte place he tokeneth an hundred
thousand tymes hymself. In the seveth place he tokeneth ten hundred
thousand tymes hymself, &c. And ye schal vnderstond that this worde
nombre is partyd into thre partyes. Somme is callyd nombre of digitys
for alle ben digitys that ben withine ten as ix, viii, vii, vi, v, iv,
iii, ii, i. Articules ben alle thei that mow be devyded into nombrys of
ten as xx, xxx, xl, and suche other. Composittys be alle nombrys that
ben componyd of a digyt and of an articule as fourtene fyftene thrittene
and suche other. Fourtene is componyd of four that is a digyt and of ten
that is an articule. Fyftene is componyd of fyve that is a digyt and of
ten that is an articule and so of others . . . . . . But as to this
rewle. In the firste place he tokeneth but himself that is to say he
tokeneth but that and no more. If that he stonde in the secunde place he
tokeneth ten tymes himself as this figure 2 here 21. this is oon and
twenty. This figure 2 stondith in the secunde place and therfor he
tokeneth ten tymes himself and ten tymes 2 is twenty and so forye of
every figure and he stonde after another toward the lest syde he schal
tokene ten tymes as moche more as he schuld token and he stode in that
place ther that the figure afore him stondeth: lo an example as thus
9634. This figure of foure that hath this schape 4 tokeneth but himself
for he stondeth in the first place. The figure of thre that hath this
schape 3 tokeneth ten tyme himself for he stondeth in the secunde place
and that is thritti. The figure of sexe that hath this schape 6 tokeneth
ten tyme more than he schuld and he stode in the place yer the figure of
thre stondeth for ther he schuld tokene but sexty. And now he tokeneth
ten tymes that is sexe hundrid. The figure of nyne that hath this schape
9 tokeneth ten tymes more than he schulde and he stode in the place ther
the figure of 6 stondeth inne for thanne he schuld tokene but nyne
hundryd. And in the place that he stondeth inne nowe he tokeneth nine
thousand. Alle the hole nombre of these foure figurys. Nine thousand
sexe hundrid and foure and thritti.




APPENDIX II.

Carmen de Algorismo.


[_From a B.M. MS., 8 C. iv., with additions from 12 E. 1 & Eg. 2622._]

  Hec algorismus ars presens dicitur[{1}]; in qua
  Talibus Indorum[{2}] fruimur his quinque figuris.
    0. 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1.
  Prima significat unum: duo vero secunda:
  Tercia significat tria: sic procede sinistre                       4
  Donec ad extremam venies, qua cifra vocatur;
  [{3}][Que nil significat; dat significare sequenti.]
  Quelibet illarum si primo limite ponas,
  Simpliciter se significat: si vero secundo,                        8
  Se decies: sursum procedas multiplicando.[{4}]
  [Namque figura sequens quevis signat decies plus,
  Ipsa locata loco quam significet pereunte:                        12
  Nam precedentes plus ultima significabit.]
  [{5}]Post predicta scias quod tres breuiter numerorum
  Distincte species sunt; nam quidam digiti sunt;
  Articuli quidam; quidam quoque compositi sunt.                    16
  [Sunt digiti numeri qui citra denarium sunt;
  Articuli decupli degitorum; compositi sunt
  Illi qui constant ex articulis digitisque.]
  Ergo, proposito numero tibi scribere, primo                       20
  Respicias quis sit numerus; quia si digitus sit,
  [{5}][Una figura satis sibi; sed si compositus sit,]
  Primo scribe loco digitum post articulum fac
  Articulus si sit, cifram post articulum sit,                      24
  [Articulum vero reliquenti in scribe figure.]
  Quolibet in numero, si par sit prima figura,
  Par erit et totum, quicquid sibi continetur;
  Impar si fuerit, totum sibi fiet et impar.                        28
  Septem[{6}] sunt partes, non plures, istius artis;
  Addere, subtrahere, duplare, dimidiare;
  Sexta est diuidere, set quinta est multiplicare;
  Radicem extrahere pars septima dicitur esse.                      32
  Subtrahis aut addis a dextris vel mediabis;
  A leua dupla, diuide, multiplicaque;
  Extrahe radicem semper sub parte sinistra.

  [Sidenote: Addition.]

  Addere si numero numerum vis, ordine tali                         36
  Incipe; scribe duas primo series numerorum
  Prima sub prima recte ponendo figuram,
  Et sic de reliquis facias, si sint tibi plures.
  Inde duas adde primas hac condicione;                             40
  Si digitus crescat ex addicione priorum,
  Primo scribe loco digitum, quicunque sit ille;
  Si sit compositus, in limite scribe sequenti
  Articulum, primo digitum; quia sic iubet ordo.                    44
  Articulus si sit, in primo limite cifram,
  Articulum vero reliquis inscribe figuris;
  Vel per se scribas si nulla figura sequatur.
  Si tibi cifra superueniens occurrerit, illam                      48
  Deme suppositam; post illic scribe figuram:
  Postea procedas reliquas addendo figuras.

  [Sidenote: Subtraction.]

  A numero numerum si sit tibi demere cura,
  Scribe figurarum series, vt in addicione;                         52
  Maiori numero numerum suppone minorem,
  Siue pari numero supponatur numerus par.
  Postea si possis a prima subtrahe primam,
  Scribens quod remanet, cifram si nil remanebit.                   56
  Set si non possis a prima demere primam;
  Procedens, vnum de limite deme sequenti;
  Et demptum pro denario reputabis ab illo,
  Subtrahe totaliter numerum quem proposuisti.                      60
  Quo facto, scribe supra quicquit remanebit,
  Facque novenarios de cifris, cum remanebis,
  Occurrant si forte cifre, dum demseris vnum;
  Postea procedas reliquas demendo figuras.                         64

  [Sidenote: Proof.]

  [{7}][Si subtracio sit bene facta probare valebis,
  Quas subtraxisti primas addendo figuras.
  Nam, subtractio si bene sit, primas retinebis,
  Et subtractio facta tibi probat additionem.]                      68

  [Sidenote: Duplation.]

  Si vis duplare numerum, sic incipe; solam
  Scribe figurarum seriem, quamcumque voles que
  Postea procedas primam duplando figuram;
  Inde quod excrescet, scribens, vbi iusserit ordo,                 72
  Juxta precepta que dantur in addicione.
  Nam si sit digitus, in primo limite scribe;
  Articulus si sit, in primo limite cifram,
  Articulum vero reliquis inscribe figuris;                         76
  Vel per se scribas, si nulla figura sequatur:
  Compositus si sit, in limite scribe sequenti
  Articulum primo, digitum; quia sic jubet ordo:
  Et sic de reliquis facias, si sint tibi plures.                   80
  [{8}][Si super extremam nota sit, monadem dat eidem,
  Quod tibi contingit, si primo dimidiabis.]

  [Sidenote: Mediation.]

  Incipe sic, si vis aliquem numerum mediare:
  Scribe figurarum seriem solam, velud ante;                        84
  Postea procedens medias, et prima figura
  Si par aut impar videas; quia si fuerit par,
  Dimidiabis eam, scribens quicquit remanebit;
  Impar si fuerit, vnum demas, mediare,                             88
  Nonne presumas, sed quod superest mediabis;
  Inde super tractum, fac demptum quod notat unum;
  Si monos, dele; sit ibi cifra post nota supra.
  Postea procedas hac condicione secunda:[{9}]                      92
  Impar[{10}] si fuerit hic vnum deme priori,
  Inscribens quinque, nam denos significabit
  Monos prædictam: si vero secunda dat vnam,
  Illa deleta, scribatur cifra; priori                              96
  Tradendo quinque pro denario mediato;
  Nec cifra scribatur, nisi inde figura sequatur:
  Postea procedas reliquas mediando figuras,
  Quin supra docui, si sint tibi mille figure.                     100
  [{11}][Si mediatio sit bene facta probare valebis,
  Duplando numerum quem primo dimidiasti.]
  Si super extremam nota sit monades dat eidem
  Quod contingat cum primo dimiabis
  Atque figura prior nuper fuerit mediando.]

  [Sidenote: Multiplication.]

  Si tu per numerum numerum vis multiplicare,
  Scribe duas, quascunque volis, series numerorum;                 104
  Ordo tamen seruetur vt vltima multiplicandi
  Ponatur super anteriorem multiplicantis;
  [{12}][A leua relique sint scripte multiplicantes.]
  In digitum cures digitum si ducere, major                        108
  Per quantes distat a denis respice, debes
  Namque suo decuplo tociens delere minorem;
  Sicque tibi numerus veniens exinde patebit.
  Postea procedas postremam multiplicando,                         112
  Juste multiplicans per cunctas inferiores,
  Condicione tamen tali; quod multiplicantis
  Scribas in capite, quicquid processerit inde;
  Set postquam fuerit hec multiplicata, figure                     116
  Anteriorentur seriei multiplicantis;
  Et sic multiplica, velut istam multiplicasti,
  Qui sequitur numerum scriptum quicunque figuris.
  Set cum multiplicas, primo sic est operandum,                    120
  Si dabit articulum tibi multiplicacio solum;
  Proposita cifra, summam transferre memento.
  Sin autem digitus excrescerit articulusque,
  Articulus supraposito digito salit ultra;                        124
  Si digitus tamen, ponas illum super ipsam,
  Subdita multiplicans hanc que super incidit illi
  Delet eam penitus, scribens quod provenit inde;
  Sed si multiplices illam posite super ipsam,                     128
  Adiungens numerum quem prebet ductus earum;
  Si supraimpositam cifra debet multiplicare,
  Prorsus eam delet, scribi que loco cifra debet,
  [{12}][Si cifra multiplicat aliam positam super ipsam,           132
  Sitque locus supra vacuus super hanc cifra fiet;]
  Si supra fuerit cifra semper pretereunda est;
  Si dubites, an sit bene multiplicando secunda,
  Diuide totalem numerum per multiplicantem,                       136
  Et reddet numerus emergens inde priorem.

  [Sidenote: Mental Multiplication.]

  [{13}][Per numerum si vis numerum quoque multiplicare
  Tantum per normas subtiles absque figuris
  Has normas poteris per versus scire sequentes.                   140
  Si tu per digitum digitum quilibet multiplicabis
  Regula precedens dat qualiter est operandum
  Articulum si per reliquum vis multiplicare
  In proprium digitum debebit uterque resolvi                      144
  Articulus digitos post per se multiplicantes
  Ex digitis quociens teneret multiplicatum
  Articuli faciunt tot centum multiplicati.
  Articulum digito si multiplicamus oportet                        148
  Articulum digitum sumi quo multiplicare
  Debemus reliquum quod multiplicaris ab illis
  Per reliquo decuplum sic omne latere nequibit
  In numerum mixtum digitum si ducere cures                        152
  Articulus mixti sumatur deinde resolvas
  In digitum post hec fac ita de digitis nec
  Articulusque docet excrescens in detinendo
  In digitum mixti post ducas multiplicantem                       156
  De digitis ut norma docet sit juncta secundo
  Multiplica summam et postea summa patebit
  Junctus in articulum purum articulumque
  [{14}][Articulum purum comittes articulum que]                   160
  Mixti pro digitis post fiat et articulus vt
  Norma jubet retinendo quod egreditur ab illis
  Articuli digitum post in digitum mixti duc
  Regula de digitis ut percipit articulusque                       164
  Ex quibus excrescens summe tu junge priori
  Sic manifesta cito fiet tibi summa petita.
  Compositum numerum mixto sic multiplicabis
  Vndecies tredecem sic est ex hiis operandum                      168
  In reliquum primum demum duc post in eundem
  Unum post deinde duc in tercia deinde per unum
  Multiplices tercia demum tunc omnia multiplicata
  In summa duces quam que fuerit te dices                          172
  Hic ut hic mixtus intentus est operandum
  Multiplicandorum de normis sufficiunt hec.]

  [Sidenote: Division.]

  Si vis dividere numerum, sic incipe primo;
  Scribe duas, quascunque voles, series numerorum;                 176
  Majori numero numerum suppone minorem,
  [{15}][Nam docet ut major teneat bis terve minorem;]
  Et sub supprima supprimam pone figuram,
  Sic reliquis reliquas a dextra parte locabis;                    180
  Postea de prima primam sub parte sinistra
  Subtrahe, si possis, quociens potes adminus istud,
  Scribens quod remanet sub tali conditione;
  Ut totiens demas demendas a remanente,                           184
  Que serie recte ponentur in anteriori,
  Unica si, tantum sit ibi decet operari;
  Set si non possis a prima demere primam,
  Procedas, et eam numero suppone sequenti;                        188
  Hanc uno retrahendo gradu quo comites retrahantur,
  Et, quotiens poteris, ab eadem deme priorem,
  Ut totiens demas demendas a remanenti,
  Nec plus quam novies quicquam tibi demere debes,                 192
  Nascitur hinc numerus quociens supraque sequentem
  Hunc primo scribas, retrahas exinde figuras,
  Dum fuerit major supra positus inferiori,
  Et rursum fiat divisio more priori;                              196
  Et numerum quotiens supra scribas pereunti,
  Si fiat saliens retrahendo, cifra locetur,
  Et pereat numero quotiens, proponas eidem
  Cifram, ne numerum pereat vis, dum locus illic                   200
  Restat, et expletis divisio non valet ultra:
  Dum fuerit numerus numerorum inferiore seorsum
  Illum servabis; hinc multiplicando probabis,

  [Sidenote: Proof.]

  Si bene fecisti, divisor multiplicetur                           204
  Per numerum quotiens; cum multiplicaveris, adde
  Totali summæ, quod servatum fuit ante,
  Reddeturque tibi numerus quem proposuisti;
  Et si nil remanet, hunc multiplicando reddet,                    208

  [Sidenote: Square Numbers.]

  Cum ducis numerum per se, qui provenit inde
  Sit tibi quadratus, ductus radix erit hujus,
  Nec numeros omnes quadratos dicere debes,
  Est autem omnis numerus radix alicujus.                          212
  Quando voles numeri radicem querere, scribi
  Debet; inde notes si sit locus ulterius impar,
  Estque figura loco talis scribenda sub illo,
  Que, per se dicta, numerum tibi destruat illum,                  216
  Vel quantum poterit ex inde delebis eandem;
  Vel retrahendo duples retrahens duplando sub ista
  Que primo sequitur, duplicatur per duplacationem,
  Post per se minuens pro posse quod est minuendum.                220
  [{16}]Post his propones digitum, qui, more priori
  Per precedentes, post per se multiplicatus,
  Destruat in quantum poterit numerum remanentem,
  Et sic procedens retrahens duplando figuram,                     224
  Preponendo novam donec totum peragatur,
  Subdupla propriis servare docetque duplatis;
  Si det compositum numerum duplacio, debet
  Inscribi digitus a parte dextra parte propinqua,                 228
  Articulusque loco quo non duplicata resessit;
  Si dabit articulum, sit cifra loco pereunte
  Articulusque locum tenet unum, de duplicata resessit;
  Si donet digitum, sub prima pone sequente,                       232
  Si supraposita fuerit duplicata figura
  Major proponi debet tantummodo cifra,
  Has retrahens solito propones more figuram,
  Usque sub extrema ita fac retrahendo figuras,                    236
  Si totum deles numerum quem proposuisti,
  Quadratus fuerit, de dupla quod duplicasti,
  Sicque tibi radix illius certa patebit,
  Si de duplatis fit juncta supprima figura;                       240
  Radicem per se multiplices habeasque
  Primo propositum, bene te fecisse probasti;
  Non est quadratus, si quis restat, sed habentur
  Radix quadrati qui stat major sub eadem;                         244
  Vel quicquid remanet tabula servare memento;
  Hoc casu radix per se quoque multiplicetur,
  Vel sic quadratus sub primo major habetur,
  Hinc addas remanens, et prius debes haberi;                      248
  Si locus extremus fuerit par, scribe figuram
  Sub pereunte loco per quam debes operari,
  Que quantum poterit supprimas destruat ambas,
  Vel penitus legem teneas operando priorem,                       252
  Si suppositum digitus suo fine repertus,
  Omnino delet illic scribi cifra debet,
  A leva si qua sit ei sociata figura;
  Si cifre remanent in fine pares decet harum                      256
  Radices, numero mediam proponere partem,
  Tali quesita radix patet arte reperta.
  Per numerum recte si nosti multiplicare
  Ejus quadratum, numerus qui pervenit inde                        260
  Dicetur cubicus; primus radix erit ejus;
  Nec numeros omnes cubicatos dicere debes,
  Est autem omnis numerus radix alicujus;

  [Sidenote: Cube Root.]

  Si curas cubici radicem quærere, primo                           264
  Inscriptum numerum distinguere per loca debes;
  Que tibi mille notant a mille notante suprema
  Initiam, summa operandi parte sinistra,
  Illic sub scribas digitum, qui multiplicatus                     268
  In semet cubice suprapositum sibi perdat,
  Et si quid fuerit adjunctum parte sinistra
  Si non omnino, quantum poteris minuendo,
  Hinc triplans retrahe saltum, faciendo sub illa                  272
  Que manet a digito deleto terna, figuram
  Illi propones quo sub triplo asocietur,
  Ut cum subtriplo per eam tripla multiplicatur;
  Hinc per eam solam productum multiplicabis,                      276
  Postea totalem numerum, qui provenit inde
  A suprapositis respectu tolle triplate
  Addita supprimo cubice tunc multiplicetur,
  Respectu cujus, numerus qui progredietur                         280
  Ex cubito ductu, supra omnes adimetur;
  Tunc ipsam delens triples saltum faciendo,
  Semper sub ternas, retrahens alias triplicatas
  Ex hinc triplatis aliam propone figuram,                         284
  Que per triplatas ducatur more priori;
  Primo sub triplis sibi junctis, postea per se,
  In numerum ducta, productum de triplicatis:
  Utque prius dixi numerus qui provenit inde                       288
  A suprapositis has respiciendo trahatur,
  Huic cubice ductum sub primo multiplicabis,
  Respectumque sui, removebis de remanenti,
  Et sic procedas retrahendo triplando figuram.                    292
  Et proponendo nonam, donec totum peragatur,
  Subtripla sub propriis servare decet triplicatis;
  Si nil in fine remanet, numerus datus ante
  Est cubicus; cubicam radicem sub tripla prebent,                 296
  Cum digito juncto quem supprimo posuisti,
  Hec cubice ducta, numerum reddant tibi primum.
  Si quid erit remanens non est cubicus, sed habetur
  Major sub primo qui stat radix cubicam,                          300
  Servari debet quicquid radice remansit,
  Extracto numero, decet hec addi cubicato.
  Quo facto, numerus reddi debet tibi primus.
  Nam debes per se radicem multiplicare                            304
  Ex hinc in numerum duces, qui provenit inde
  Sub primo cubicus major sic invenietur;
  Illi jungatur remanens, et primus habetur,
  Si per triplatum numerum nequeas operari;                        308
  Cifram propones, nil vero per hanc operare
  Set retrahens illam cum saltu deinde triplata,
  Propones illi digitum sub lege priori,
  Cumque cifram retrahas saliendo, non triplicabis,                312
  Namque nihil cifre triplacio dicitur esse;
  At tu cum cifram protraxeris aut triplicata,
  Hanc cum subtriplo semper servare memento:
  Si det compositum, digiti triplacio debet                        316
  Illius scribi, digitus saliendo sub ipsam;
  Digito deleto, que terna dicitur esse;
  Jungitur articulus cum triplata pereunte,
  Set facit hunc scribi per se triplacio prima,                    320
  Que si det digitum per se scribi facit illum;
  Consumpto numero, si sole fuit tibi cifre
  Triplato, propone cifram saltum faciendo,
  Cumque cifram retrahe triplam, scribendo figuram,                324
  Preponas cifre, sic procedens operare,
  Si tres vel duo serie in sint, pone sub yma,
  A dextris digitum servando prius documentum.
  Si sit continua progressio terminus nuper                        328
  Per majus medium totalem multiplicato;
  Si par, per medium tunc multiplicato sequentem.
  Set si continua non sit progressio finis:
  Impar, tunc majus medium si multiplicabis,                       332
  Si par per medium sibi multiplicato propinquum.                  333


FOOTNOTES (Appendix II, Carmen de Algorismo):

  [1: “Hec præsens ars dicitur algorismus ab Algore rege ejus
  inventore, vel dicitur ab _algos_ quod est ars, et _rodos_ quod est
  numerus; quæ est ars numerorum vel numerandi, ad quam artem bene
  sciendum inveniebantur apud Indos bis quinque (id est decem)
  figuræ.” --_Comment. Thomæ de Novo-Mercatu._ MS. Bib. Reg. Mus.
  Brit. 12 E. 1.]

  [2: “Hæ necessariæ figuræ sunt Indorum characteros.” _MS. de
  numeratione._ Bib. Sloan. Mus. Brit. 513, fol. 58. “Cum vidissem
  Yndos constituisse IX literas in universo numero suo propter
  dispositionem suam quam posuerunt, volui patefacere de opere quod
  sit per eas aliquidque esset levius discentibus, si Deus voluerit.
  Si autem Indi hoc voluerunt et intentio illorum nihil novem literis
  fuit, causa que mihi potuit. Deus direxit me ad hoc. Si vero alia
  dicam preter eam quam ego exposui, hoc fecerunt per hoc quod ego
  exposui, eadem tam certissime et absque ulla dubitatione poterit
  inveniri. Levitasque patebit aspicientibus et discentibus.” MS.
  U.L.C., Ii. vi. 5, f. 102.]

  [3: From Eg. 2622.]

  [4: 8 C. iv. inserts
    Nullum cipa significat: dat significare sequenti.]

  [5: From 12 E. 1.]

  [6:
    En argorisme devon prendre
    Vii especes . . . .
    Adision subtracion
    Doubloison mediacion
    Monteploie et division
    Et de radix eustracion
    A chez vii especes savoir
    Doit chascun en memoire avoir
    Letres qui figures sont dites
    Et qui excellens sont ecrites. --MS. _Seld. Arch._ B. 26.]

  [7: From 12 E. 1.]

  [8: From 12 E. 1.]

  [9: 8 C. iv. inserts
    Atque figura prior nuper fuerit mediando.]

  [10: _I.e._ figura secundo loco posita.]

  [11: So 12 E. 1; 8 C. iv. inserts--

  [12: 12 E. 1 inserts.]

  [13: 12 E. 1 inserts to l. 174.]

  [14: 12 E. 1 omits, Eg. 2622 inserts.]

  [15: 12 E. 1 inserts.]

  [16: 8 C. iv. inserts--
    Hinc illam dele duplans sub ei psalliendo
    Que sequitur retrahens quicquid fuerit duplicatum.]




INDEX OF TECHNICAL TERMS[1*]

    [Footnote 1*: This Index has been kindly prepared by Professor
    J. B. Dale, of King’s College, University of London, and the
    best thanks of the Society are due to him for his valuable
    contribution.]

  [Transcriber’s Note:
  The Technical Terms and Glossary (following) refer to page and line
  numbers in the printed book. Information in [[double brackets]] has
  been added by the transcriber to aid in text searching.]


  +algorisme+, 33/12; +algorym+, +augrym+, 3/3; the art of computing,
    using the so-called Arabic numerals.
  The word in its various forms is derived from the Arabic
   _al-Khowarazmi_ (i.e. the native of Khwarazm (Khiva)). This was the
    surname of Ja’far Mohammad ben Musa, who wrote a treatise early in
    the 9th century (see p. xiv).
  The form _algorithm_ is also found, being suggested by a supposed
    derivation from the Greek ἀριθμός (number).

  +antery+, 24/11; to move figures to the right of the position in
    which they are first written. This operation is performed repeatedly
    upon the multiplier in multiplication, and upon certain figures
    which arise in the process of root extraction.

  +anterioracioun+, 50/5; the operation of moving figures to the
    right.  [[written anteriorac{i}o{u}n or anterioracio{u}n]]

  +article+, 34/23; +articul+, 5/31; +articuls+, 9/36, 29/7,8;
    a number divisible by ten without remainder.  [[also articull{e}]]

  +cast+, 8/12; to add one number to another.
  ‘Addition is a _casting_ together of two numbers into one number,’
    8/10.

  +cifre+, 4/1; the name of the figure 0. The word is derived from the
    Arabic _sifr_ = empty, nothing. Hence _zero_.
  A cipher is the symbol of the absence of number or of zero quantity.
    It may be used alone or in conjunction with digits or other ciphers,
    and in the latter case, according to the position which it occupies
    relative to the other figures, indicates the absence of units, or
    tens, or hundreds, etc. The great superiority of the Arabic to all
    other systems of notation resides in the employment of this symbol.
    When the cipher is not used, the place value of digits has to be
    indicated by writing them in assigned rows or columns. Ciphers,
    however, may be interpolated amongst the significant figures used,
    and as they sufficiently indicate the positions of the empty rows or
    columns, the latter need not be indicated in any other way. The
    practical performance of calculations is thus enormously facilitated
    (see p. xvi).

  +componede+, 33/24; +composyt+, 5/35; with reference to numbers, one
    compounded of a multiple of ten and a digit.
    [[written componed{e}]]

  +conuertide+ = conversely, 46/29, 47/9.
    [[written co{n}u{er}tid{e} or {con}u{er}tid{e}]]

  +cubicede+, 50/13; +to be c.+, to have its cube root found.
    [[written cubiced{e}]]

  +cubike nombre+, 47/8; a number formed by multiplying a given number
    twice by itself, _e.g._ 27 = 3 × 3 × 3. Now called simply a cube.
    [[written cubik{e} ...]]

  +decuple+, 22/12; the product of a number by ten. Tenfold.

  +departys+ = divides, 5/29.  [[written dep{ar}tys]]

  +digit+, 5/30; +digitalle+, 33/24; a number less than ten,
    represented by one of the nine Arabic numerals.
    [[written digitall{e}]]

  +dimydicion+, 7/23; the operation of dividing a number by two.
    Halving.  [[written dimydicioñ]]

  +duccioun+, multiplication, 43/9.  [[written duccio{u}n]]

  +duplacion+, 7/23, 14/15; the operation of multiplying a number by
    two. Doubling.
    [[written duplacioñ or duplacioɳ with fancy “n”]]

  +i-mediet+ = halved, 19/23.

  +intercise+ = broken, 46/2; intercise Progression is the name given
    to either of the Progressions 1, 3, 5, 7, etc.; 2, 4, 6, 8, etc.,
    in which the common difference is 2.  [[written int{er}cise]]

  +lede into+, multiply by, 47/18.
    [[words always separated, as “lede ... into”]]

  +lyneal nombre+, 46/14; a number such as that which expresses the
    measure of the length of a line, and therefore is not _necessarily_
    the product of two or more numbers (_vide_ Superficial, Solid). This
    appears to be the meaning of the phrase as used in _The Art of
    Nombryng_. It is possible that the numbers so designated are the
    prime numbers, that is, numbers not divisible by any other number
    except themselves and unity, but it is not clear that this
    limitation is intended.

  +mediacioun+, 16/36, 38/16; dividing by two (see also +dimydicion+).
    [[written mediacioɳ with fancy “n”, generally without “u”]]

  +medlede nombre+, 34/1; a number formed of a multiple of ten and a
    digit (_vide_ componede, composyt).  [[written medled{e} ...]]

  +medye+, 17/8, to halve; +mediete+, halved, 17/30; +ymedit+, 20/9.

  +naturelle progressioun+, 45/22; the series of numbers 1, 2, 3, etc.
    [[written naturell{e} p{ro}gressio{u}n]]

  +produccioun+, multiplication, 50/11.  [[written produccio{u}n]]

  +quadrat nombre+, 46/12; a number formed by multiplying a given
    number by itself, _e.g._ 9 = 3 × 3, a square.

  +rote+, 7/25; +roote+, 47/11; root. The roots of squares and cubes
    are the numbers from which the squares and cubes are derived by
    multiplication into themselves.

  +significatyf+, significant, 5/14; The significant figures of a
    number are, strictly speaking, those other than zero, _e.g._ in 3 6
    5 0 4 0 0, the significant figures are 3, 6, 5, 4. Modern usage,
    however, regards all figures between the two extreme significant
    figures as significant, even when some are zero. Thus, in the above
    example, 3 6 5 0 4 are considered significant.

  +solide nombre+, 46/37; a number which is the product of three other
    numbers, _e.g._ 66 = 11 × 2 × 3.  [[usually written solid{e}]]

  +superficial nombre+, 46/18; a number which is the product of two
    other numbers, _e.g._ 6 = 2 × 3.
    [[written sup{er}ficial or sup{er}ficiall{e}]]

  +ternary+, consisting of three digits, 51/7.
    [[written t{er}nary]]

  +vnder double+, a digit which has been doubled, 48/3.

  +vnder-trebille+, a digit which has been trebled, 49/28;
    +vnder-triplat+, 49/39.
    [[written vnder-trebill{e}, vnder-t{r}iplat]]

  +w+, a symbol used to denote half a unit, 17/33
    [[shown in e-text as superscript ʷ]]




GLOSSARY

  [Transcriber’s Note:

  Words whose first appearance is earlier than the page cited in the
  Glossary are identified in double-bracketed notes. To aid in text
  searching, words written with internal {italics} are also noted,
  and context is given for common words.]


  +ablacioun+, taking away, 36/21  [[written ablacio{u}n]]
  +addyst+, haddest, 10/37
  +agregacioun+, addition, 45/22. (First example in N.E.D., 1547.)
    [[written ag{r}egacio{u}n]]
  +a-ȝenenes+, against, 23/10
  +allgate+, always, 8/39
  +als+, as, 22/24
  +and+, if, 29/8;
    +&+, 4/27;
    +& yf+, 20/7
  +a-nendes+, towards, 23/15
  +aproprede+, appropriated, 34/27  [[written ap{ro}pred{e}]]
  +apwereth+, appears, 61/8
  +a-risyȝt+, arises, 14/24
  +a-rowe+, in a row, 29/10
  +arsemetrike+, arithmetic, 33/1  [[written arsemetrik{e}]]
  +ayene+, again, 45/15

  +bagle+, crozier, 67/12
  +bordure+ = ordure, row, 43/30  [[written bordur{e}]]
  +borro+, _inf._ borrow, 11/38;
    _imp. s._ +borowe+, 12/20;
    _pp._ +borwed+, 12/15;
    +borred+, 12/19
  +boue+, above, 42/34

  +caputule+, chapter, 7/26  [[written caputul{e}]]
  +certayn+, assuredly, 18/34  [[written c{er}tayɳ]]
  +clepede+, called, 47/7  [[written cleped{e}]]
  +competently+, conveniently, 35/8
  +compt+, count, 47/29
  +contynes+, contains, 21/12;  [[written {con}tynes]]
    _pp._ +contenythe+, 38/39  [[written co{n}tenyth{e}]]
  +craft+, art, 3/4

  +distingue+, divide, 51/5

  +egalle+, equal, 45/21  [[written egall{e}]]
  +excep+, except, 5/16]
  +exclusede+, excluded, 34/37  [[written exclused{e}]]
  +excressent+, resulting, 35/16  [[written exc{re}ssent]]
  +exeant+, resulting, 43/26
  +expone+, expound, 3/23

  +ferye+ = ferþe, fourth, 70/12
  +figure+ = figures, 5/1  [[written fig{ure}]]
  +for-by+, past, 12/11
  +fors; no f.+, no matter, 22/24
  +forseth+, matters, 53/30
  +forye+ = forþe, forth, 71/8]
  +fyftye+ = fyftþe, fifth, 70/16

  +grewe+, Greek, 33/13

  +haluendel+, half, 16/16;
    +haldel+, 19/4;
    _pl._ +haluedels+, 16/16
  +hayst+, hast, 17/3, 32
  +hast+, haste, 22/25  [[in “haue hast to”]]
  +heer+, higher, 9/35
  +here+, their, 7/26  [[in “in her{e} caputul{e}”]]
  +here-a-fore+, heretofore, 13/7  [[written her{e}-a-for{e}]]
  +heyth+, was called, 3/5
  +hole+, whole, 4/39;
    +holle+, 17/1;
    +hoole+, of three dimensions, 46/15
  +holdyþe+, holds good, 30/5
  +how be it that+, although, 44/4

  +lede+ = lete, let, 8/37
  +lene+, lend, 12/39
  +lest+, least, 43/27  [[in “at the lest”]]
  +lest+ = left, 71/9  [[in “the lest syde”]]
  +leue+, leave, 6/5;
    _pr. 3 s._ +leues+, remains, 11/19;  [[first in 10/40]]
    +leus+, 11/28;
    _pp._ +laft+, left, 19/24
  +lewder+, more ignorant, 3/3  [[written lewd{er}]]
  +lust+, desirest to, 45/13
  +lyȝt+, easy, 15/31
  +lymytes+, limits, 34/18;
    +lynes+, 34/12;
    +lynees+, 34/17;
    Lat. limes, _pl._ limites.

  +maystery+, achievement;  [[written mayst{er}y]]
    +no m.+, no achievement, i.e. easy, 19/10
  +me+, _indef. pron._ one, 42/1  [[first in 34/16]]
  +mo+, more, 9/16
    +moder+ = more (Lat. majorem), 43/22
  +most+, must, 30/3  [[first in 3/12 and many more]]
  +multipliede+, +to be m.+ = multiplying, 40/9
  +mynvtes+, the sixty parts into which a unit is divided, 38/25
    [[written mynvt{es}]]
  +myse-wroȝt+, mis-wrought, 14/11

  +nether+, nor, 34/25  [[in “It was, nether is”]]
  +nex+, next, 19/9
  +noȝt+, nought, 5/7  [[first in 4/8]]
  +note+, not, 30/5

  +oo+, one, 42/20; +o+, 42/21  [[first in 34/27; 33/22]]
  +omest+, uppermost, higher, 35/26;
    +omyst+, 35/28
  +omwhile+, sometimes, 45/31  [[first in 39/17]]
  +on+, one, 8/29  [[in “on vnder an-oþ{er}”]]
  +opyne+, plain, 47/8  [[written opyn{e}]]
  +or+, before, 13/25  [[in “or þou be-gan”]]
  +or+ = þe oþ{er}, the other, 28/34  [[in “or by-twene”]]
  +ordure+, order, 34/9;
    row, 43/1  [[word form is “order”]]
  +other+, or, 33/13, 43/26;
    [[in “art other craft” on 33/13, “other how oft” on 43/26;
    note also “one other other” on 35/24]]
    +other . . . or+, either . . . or, 38/37
    [[in “other it is even or od{e}” on 38/37;
    there are earlier occurrences]]
  +ouerer+, upper, 42/15  [[written ou{er}er]]
  +ouer-hippede+, passed over, 43/19  [[written ou{er}-hipped{e}]]

  +recte+, directly, 27/20  [[in “stondes not recte”;
    also on 26/31 in “recte ou{er} his hede”]]
  +remayner+, remainder, 56/28
  +representithe+, represented, 39/14  [[written rep{re}sentith{e}]]
  +resteth+, remains, 63/29  [[first in 57/29 and others]]
  +rewarde+, regard, 48/6  [[written reward{e}]]
  +rew+, row, 4/8
  +rewle+, row, 4/20, 7/12;
    [[in “place of þe rewle”, “þe rewle of fig{ure}s”]]
    +rewele+, 4/18;
    +rewles+, rules, 5/33

  +s.+ = scilicet, 3/8  [[in “s. Algorism{us}”]]
  +sentens+, meaning, 14/29
  +signifye(tyf)+, 5/13. The last three letters are added above the
    line, evidently because of the word ‘significatyf’ in l. 14.
    But the ‘Solucio,’ which contained the word, has been omitted.
  +sithen+, since, 33/8
  +some+, sum, result, 40/17, 32
    [[first in 36/21 in “me may see a some”, then in “the same some”
    and “to some of”]]
  +sowne+, pronounce, 6/29
  +singillatim+, singly, 7/25
  +spices+, species, kinds, 34/4  [[first in 5/34 and others]]
  +spyl+, waste, 14/26
  +styde+, stead, 18/20
  +subtrahe+, subtract, 48/12;
    _pp._ +subtrayd+, 13/21
  +sythes+, times, 21/16

  +taȝt+, taught, 16/36
  +take+, _pp._ taken;
    +t. fro+, starting from, 45/22  [[in “fro oone or tweyn{e} take”]]
  +taward+, toward, 23/34
  +thouȝt+, though, 5/20
  +trebille+, multiply by three, 49/26  [[written trebill{e}]]
  +twene+, two, 8/11  [[first in 4/23]]
  +þow+, though, 25/15  [[in “þow þ{o}u take”]]
  +þowȝt+, thought;
    +be þ.+, mentally, 28/4
  +þus+ = þis, this, 20/33  [[in “þus nombur 214”]]

  +vny+, unite, 45/10

  +wel+, wilt, 14/31  [[in “If þ{o}u wel”]]
  +wete+, wit, 15/16;
    +wyte+, know, 8/38;
    _pr. 2 s._ +wost+, 12/38
  +wex+, become, 50/18
  +where+, whether, 29/12
    [[written wher{e} in “wher{e} in þe secunde, or”]]
  +wher-thurghe+, whence, 49/15  [[written Wher-thurgh{e}]]
  +worch+, work, 8/19;  [[first in 7/35]]
    +wrich+, 8/35;
    +wyrch+, 6/19;
    _imp. s._ +worch+, 15/9;  [[first in 9/6]]
    _pp._ +y-wroth+, 13/24
  +write+, written, 29/19;
    [[first in 6/37 in “hast write”, “be write”]]
    +y-write+, 16/1
  +wryrchynge+ = wyrchynge, working, 30/4  [[written wryrchyng{e}]]
  +w^t+, with, 55/8

  +y-broth+, brought, 21/18
  +ychon+, each one, 29/10  [[written ychoɳ]]
  +ydo+, done, added, 9/6
    [[first in 8/37 in “haue ydo”; 9/6 in “ydo all to-ged{er}”]]
  +ylke+, same, 5/12
  +y-lyech+, alike, 22/23
  +y-myȝt+, been able, 12/2
  +y-nowȝt+, enough, 15/31;
    +ynovȝt+, 18/34
  +yove+, given, 45/33
  +y^t+, that, 52/8
  +y-write+, _v._ +write.+
  +y-wroth+, _v._ +worch.+


       *       *       *       *       *
           *       *       *       *
       *       *       *       *       *


MARGINAL NOTES:

+Headnotes+ have been moved to the beginning of the appropriate
paragraph. Headnotes were omitted from the two Appendixes, as sidenotes
give the same information.

+Line Numbers+ are cited in the Index and Glossary. They have been
omitted from the e-text except in the one verse selection (App. II,
_Carmen de Algorismo_). Instead, the Index and Glossary include
supplemental information to help locate each word.

+Numbered Notes+:

  Numbered sidenotes show page or leaf numbers from the original MSS.
  In the e-text, the page number is shown as [*123b] inline; mid-word
  page breaks are marked with a supplemental asterisk [*]. Numbers are
  not used.

  Footnotes give textual information such as variant readings. They
  have been numbered sequentially within each title, with numbers
  shown as [{1}] to avoid confusion with bracked text--including
  single numerals--in the original. Editorial notes are shown as [1*].
  When a footnote calls for added text, the addition is shown in the
  body text with [[double brackets]].

+Sidenotes+ giving a running synopsis of the text have been moved to the
beginning of each paragraph, where they are shown as a single note.


ERRORS AND ANOMALIES (Noted by Transcriber):

Introduction:

  dated Mij^c
    [_In this and the remainder of the paragraph, the letter shown as
    ^c is printed directly above the preceding j._]

The Crafte of Nombrynge:

  sursu{m} {pr}ocedas m{u}ltiplicando
    [_Italicized as shown: error for “p{ro}cedas”?_]
  Sidenote: Our author makes a slip here
    [_Elsewhere in the book, numerical errors are corrected in the
    body text, with a footnote giving the original form._]
  ten tymes so mych is þe nounb{re}
    [_text unchanged: error for “as”?_]
  6 tymes 24, [{19}]þen take
    [_misplaced footnote anchor in original:
    belongs with “6 times 24”_]
  Fn. 7: ‘Subt{ra}has a{u}t addis a dext{ri}s  [_open quote missing_]

The Art of Nombryng:

  oone of the digitis as .10. of 1.. 20. of. 2.
    [_text unchanged: error for “as .10. of .1. 20. of .2.”?_]
  sette a-side half of tho m{inutes}
    [_text unchanged: error for “the”?_]
  and. 10. as before is come therof
    [_text unchanged: error for “and .10.”?_]
  Sidenote: Where to set the quotiente  [_spelling (1922) unchanged_]
  Sidenote: Definition of Progression.  [_f in “of” illegible_]
  Sidenote: ... giving the value of ab.^2  [_That is, “a(b^2).”_]

Accomptynge by counters:

  For example of the [*117a.] ly[*]nes
    [_final . in sidenote missing or invisible_]
    [_also in 121b, 122a]
  which in the fyrst summe is 5
    [_invisible “5” supplied by transcriber_]
  [*116a (_sic_).]
    [_Editor’s “sic”: page numbering jumps back to 116 instead of the
    expected 123, and continues from 116._]
  [*123a] ... set downe y^e multiplyer .v. tymes, as here you se
    [_Diagram shown as printed, with 35500 for 36500 in one column,
    and apparent misplaced “thousands” marker_]
  365 (which is the nomber of dayes ...  [_open ( missing_]

The arte of nombrynge by the hande:

  for 1 the fynger is clasped in
    [_In at least one printing of the text, “clasped” is misprinted
    as “elasped”_]
  but this teacyed me not  [_text unchanged_]

Appendix I: A Treatise on the Numeration of Algorism:

  _See Introduction and Glossary for ſ:f and þ:y errors_

Appendix II: Carmen de Algorismo:

  _In this selection, errors that are not explained in footnotes were
  assumed to be typographic._

  l. 99 Postea procedas  [procdeas]
  l. 163 Articuli digitum post in digitum mixti duc  [post iu]






End of Project Gutenberg's The Earliest Arithmetics in English, by Anonymous

*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE EARLIEST ARITHMETICS IN ENGLISH ***

***** This file should be named 25664-0.txt or 25664-0.zip *****
This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/5/6/6/25664/

Produced by Louise Hope, David Starner and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net


Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
will be renamed.

Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
redistribution.



*** START: FULL LICENSE ***

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
http://gutenberg.org/license).


Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works

1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.

1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works.  See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.

1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
States.

1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
copied or distributed:

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org

1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
1.E.9.

1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.

1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.

1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg-tm License.

1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
that

- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."

- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
     License.  You must require such a user to return or
     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
     Project Gutenberg-tm works.

- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
     of receipt of the work.

- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.

1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
your equipment.

1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.

1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.


Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm

Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
people in all walks of life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.


Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.

The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
page at http://pglaf.org

For additional contact information:
     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
     Chief Executive and Director
     gbnewby@pglaf.org


Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
particular state visit http://pglaf.org

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate


Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works.

Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.


Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.


Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:

     http://www.gutenberg.org

This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.